LogoiWave 300i - 500i
  • en-US
    • Contact
    • Legal Notice
    • General Terms & Conditions
    • Data Privacy Statement
    • Cookie Policy
    • 006-25092024
    • Safety Instructions
      • Explanation of Safety Instructions
      • General
      • Intended Use
      • Grid Connection
      • Environmental Conditions
      • Obligations of the Operating Company
      • Obligations of Personnel
      • Residual current circuit breaker
      • Personal Protection and Protection of Others
      • Data on noise emission values
      • Danger from toxic gases and vapors
      • Danger from Flying Sparks
      • Risks from mains current and welding current
      • Stray welding currents
      • EMC Device Classifications
      • EMC measures
      • EMF measures
      • Particular hazard areas
      • Requirement for the shielding gas
      • Danger from Shielding Gas Cylinders
      • Danger Posed by Shielding Gas Leak
      • Safety Measures at the Setup Location and during Transport
      • Safety Measures in Normal Operation
      • Maintenance and repair
      • Safety inspection
      • Disposal
      • Safety symbols
      • Data backup
      • Copyright
      • Intended use
    • General information
      • General
        • Device concept
        • Power source = welding machine
        • Operating principle
        • Application areas
        • Conformities
        • Bluetooth trademarks
        • Warning notices on the device
        • Options
        • OPT/i Safety Stop PL d option
    • Operating controls, connections and mechanical components
      • Control Panel
        • General
        • Control panel
        • Input options
      • Display
        • Display
        • Switching to full screen
        • Next page - previous page
        • Animated graphics
        • Grayed-out welding parameters
      • Connections, Switches, and Mechanical Components
        • Connections and mechanical components
    • Before installation and initial operation
      • Before installation and initial operation
        • Safety
        • Intended use
        • Setup regulations
        • Mains connection
        • Generator-powered operation
      • Connecting the Mains Cable
        • General
        • Safety
        • Specified mains cable
        • Connecting the mains cable for nc welding machines
        • Connecting the mains cable for MV welding machines
      • Locking and unlocking the welding machine using the NFC key
        • General
        • Locking and unlocking the welding machine using the NFC key
    • TIG
      • System components
        • System components
        • Notes on the cooling unit
      • Minimum equipment for TIG welding
        • Minimum equipment for TIG AC welding
        • Minimum equipment for TIG DC welding
      • TIG welding processes
        • TIG DynamicWire
      • Commissioning
        • Safety
        • General
        • Assembling the system components (overview)
        • Connecting the gas cylinder
        • Connecting the welding torch to the welding machine and cooling unit
        • Establishing a ground earth connection to the workpiece
        • Other activities
      • TIG Operating Modes
        • Safety
        • Symbols and explanations
        • 2-step mode
        • 4-step mode
        • Special 4-step mode:
          Version 1
        • Special 4-step mode:
          Version 2
        • Special 4-step mode:
          Version 3
        • Special 4-step mode:
          Version 4
        • Special 4-step mode:
          Version 5
        • Special 4-step mode:
          Version 6
        • Spot welding
      • TIG welding
        • Safety
        • TIG welding
        • Welding parameters for TIG welding
      • Igniting the arc
        • General
        • Igniting the arc using high frequency
          (HF ignition)
        • Contact ignition
        • Igniting the arc using high-frequency contact
          (Touch-HF)
        • Electrode overload
        • End of welding
      • TIG special functions
        • Ignition timeout function
        • TIG pulsing
        • Tacking function
        • CycleTIG
      • TIG process parameters
        • TIG process parameters
        • Process parameters for TIG pulse
        • Process parameters for TIG AC
        • General TIG process parameters
        • Process parameters for ignition and operating mode
        • CycleTIG
        • Wire speed setting
        • TIG gas settings
        • Conducting an R/L alignment
    • Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
      • Minimum equipment for MMA and CEL welding and for arc air gouging
        • Minimum equipment for MMA and CEL welding
        • Minimum equipment for arc air gouging
      • Commissioning
        • Preparation
      • Manual Metal Arc Welding
        • Safety
        • Manual metal arc welding
        • Welding parameters for manual metal arc welding and CEL welding
      • Hot-Start, Soft-Start, Anti-Stick Functions
        • Starting current > 100 % (HotStart)
        • Starting current < 100 %
          (SoftStart)
        • Anti-stick function
      • Stick electrode / CEL Process parameters
        • Stick electrode / CEL Process parameters
        • Process parameters for stick electrode
        • Process parameters for CEL
      • Arc air gouging (iWave 500 DC and iWave 500 AC/DC)
        • Gouging (Arc Air Gouging)
        • Safety
        • Preparation
        • Arc air gouging
    • Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
      • Multiprocess PRO
        • General
        • System components
      • Minimum equipment for MIG/MAG welding
        • Minimum equipment for MIG/MAG welding
      • MIG/MAG welding processes
        • MIG/MAG pulse synergic welding
        • MIG/MAG standard synergic welding
        • PMC process
        • LSC process
        • SynchroPulse welding
        • CMT process
        • CMT Cycle Step welding process
        • SlagHammer
        • Stitch welding
        • WireSense
        • ConstantWire
      • MIG/MAG Welding Packages
        • General
        • Welding Packages
      • MIG/MAG welding characteristics
        • Welding characteristics
      • Status bar for MIG/MAG welding
        • Status bar
        • Status bar - current limit reached
      • MIG/MAG Operating Modes
        • General
        • Symbols and explanations
        • 2-step mode
        • 4-step mode
        • Special 4-step mode
        • Special 2-step mode
        • Spot welding
      • Preparing for MIG/MAG welding
        • Safety
        • Correct routing of the interconnecting hosepack
        • Context
        • Setting up MIG/MAG system components (overview)
      • MIG/MAG and CMT welding
        • Safety
        • Setting the welding process and operating mode via the status bar
        • Setting the welding process and operating mode via the menu bar
        • Selecting the filler metal and shielding gas
        • Setting the welding parameters
        • Adjusting the quantity of shielding gas
        • MIG/MAG or CMT welding
      • Spot welding and stitch welding
        • Spot welding
        • Stitch welding
      • MIG/MAG and CMT welding parameters
        • Welding parameters for MIG/MAG pulse synergic welding and PMC welding
        • Welding parameters for MIG/MAG standard synergic welding, LSC welding, and CMT welding
        • Welding parameters for MIG/MAG standard manual welding
        • Explanation of footnotes
      • MIG/MAG process parameters
        • MIG/MAG process parameters
        • Process parameters for weld start / weld end
        • Process parameters for gas setup
        • Process parameters for process control
        • Penetration stabilizer
        • Arc length stabilizer
        • Combination of penetration stabilizer and arc length stabilizer
        • Process parameters for SynchroPulse
        • Process parameters for Process Mix
        • Process parameters for additive welding process control
        • Process parameters for CMT Cycle Step
        • Process parameters for AC setup
        • Process parameters for spot welding
        • Process parameters for interval
        • Process parameters for manual setup
        • R/L alignment
    • Job Mode
      • EasyJob mode
        • General
        • Activating EasyJob mode
        • Storing EasyJob operating points
        • Retrieving EasyJob operating points
        • Deleting EasyJob operating points
        • Loading more EasyJobs
      • Job Mode
        • General
        • Saving settings as a job
        • Welding job - retrieving jobs
        • Optimizing a job
        • Renaming a job
        • Deleting a job
        • Loading a job
        • Job Mode with WF 25i Dual
      • Job process parameters
        • JOB process parameters
        • Process parameters for "Optimize Job"
        • Setting correction limits for a job
        • Pre-settings for "Save as Job"
    • Process parameters
      • Overview
        • Overview
      • Process parameters - Components & monitoring
        • Process parameters - Components & Monitoring
        • Process parameters for components
        • Draining/filling the torch hosepack
        • System adjustment
        • Arc break watchdog
        • Wire stick contact tip
        • Wire stick workpiece
        • Welding circuit coupling
        • Wire end monitoring
        • Gas monitoring
        • Motor force monitoring
        • Wire buffer monitoring
    • Defaults
      • Defaults
        • General
        • Overview
      • Defaults - View
        • Defaults screen
        • Selecting the language
        • Selecting units/standards
        • Setting the date and time
        • Retrieving system data
        • Displaying characteristics
        • Parameter view TIG
        • Parameter view TIG iJob
        • Parameter view MIG/MAG
        • JobMaster MIG/MAG view
      • Defaults - System
        • Defaults - System
        • Retrieving device information
        • Restoring factory settings
        • Restoring the website password
        • Setup mode
        • Service Connect
        • Network settings
        • Setting network parameters manually
        • Setting up WLAN
        • Bluetooth setup
        • WeldCube Air
        • Client authorization
        • Welding machine configuration
        • Wirefeeder setup
        • Interface setup
        • TWIN Setup
      • Defaults - Documentation
        • Defaults - Documentation
        • Setting the sample rate
        • Viewing the logbook
        • Switching limit value monitoring on/off
      • Defaults Administration
        • Defaults Administration
      • User management
        • General
        • Explanation of terms
        • Predefined roles and users
        • User administration overview
      • Create administrator and roles
        • Recommendation for creating roles and users
        • Creating an administrator key
        • Creating roles
        • Copying roles
      • Creating users
        • Creating users
        • Copying users
      • Editing roles/users, deactivating user management
        • Editing roles
        • Deleting roles
        • Editing users
        • Deleting users
        • Deactivating user management
        • Lost administrator NFC key?
      • CENTRUM - Central User Management
        • Activating the CENTRUM server
    • SmartManager – the welding machine website
      • SmartManager – the welding machine website
        • General
        • Opening and logging into the SmartManager for the welding machine
        • Help functions if logging in does not work
        • Changing the password/logging out
        • Settings
        • Language selection
        • Status indicator
        • Fronius
      • Current system data
        • Current system data
      • Documentation logbook
        • Logbook
        • Basic settings
      • Job data
        • Job data
        • Job overview
        • Editing a job
        • Importing a job
        • Exporting a job
        • Exporting job(s) as ...
      • Welding machine settings
        • Process parameters
        • Designation & location
        • Parameter display
        • Date & time
        • Network settings
      • Save and restore
        • General
        • Save and restore
        • Automatic backup
      • Signal visualisation
        • Signal visualization
      • User management
        • General
        • Users
        • User roles
        • Export & import
        • CENTRUM Server
      • Overview
        • Overview
        • Expanding all groups/collapsing all groups
        • Export component overview as ...
      • Update
        • Update
        • Finding the update file (performing an update)
        • Fronius WeldConnect
      • Function packages
        • Function packages
        • Welding Packages
        • Options
        • Loading a function package
      • Synergic lines overview
        • Overview of characteristics
        • Show filter
      • Screenshot
        • Screenshot
      • Interface
        • Interface
    • Troubleshooting and Maintenance
      • Troubleshooting
        • General
        • Safety
        • MIG/MAG welding – current limit
        • Troubleshooting the welding machine
      • Service, maintenance and disposal
        • General
        • Safety
        • At every start-up
        • Every 2 months
        • Every 6 months
        • Updating the firmware
        • Disposal
    • Appendix
      • Average consumption values during welding
        • Average shielding gas consumption during TIG welding
        • Average shielding gas consumption during MIG/MAG welding
        • Average wire electrode consumption during MIG/MAG welding
      • Technical data
        • Explanation of the term duty cycle
        • Special Voltage
        • Overview with critical raw materials, year of production of the device
        • iWave 300i DC
        • iWave 300i DC /nc
        • iWave 300i DC /MV/nc
        • iWave 400i DC
        • iWave 400i DC /nc
        • iWave 400i DC /MV/nc
        • iWave 500i DC
        • iWave 500i DC /nc
        • iWave 500i DC /MV/nc
        • iWave 300i AC/DC
        • iWave 300i AC/DC /nc
        • iWave 300i AC/DC /MV/nc
        • iWave 400i AC/DC
        • iWave 400i AC/DC /nc
        • iWave 400i
          AC/DC /MV/nc
        • iWave 500i AC/DC
        • iWave 500i AC/DC /nc
        • iWave 500i AC/DC /MV/nc
        • Radio parameters

    iWave 300i - 500i Operating instructions

    Control panel
    Connections and mechanical components
    TIG commissioning
    TIG welding
    TIG process parameters
    Manual metal arc welding
    Manual metal arc welding process parameters
    Defaults
    Technical data
    Spare parts

    Safety Instructions

    Explanation of Safety Instructions

    DANGER!

    Indicates an immediate danger.

    Death or serious injury may result if appropriate precautions are not taken.

    WARNING!

    Indicates a possibly dangerous situation.

    Death or serious injury may result if appropriate precautions are not taken.

    CAUTION!

    Indicates a situation where damage or injury could occur.

    Minor injury or damage to property may result if appropriate precautions are not taken.

    NOTE!

    Indicates the possibility of flawed results and damage to the equipment.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Explanation of Safety Instructions

    DANGER!

    Indicates an immediate danger.

    Death or serious injury may result if appropriate precautions are not taken.

    WARNING!

    Indicates a possibly dangerous situation.

    Death or serious injury may result if appropriate precautions are not taken.

    CAUTION!

    Indicates a situation where damage or injury could occur.

    Minor injury or damage to property may result if appropriate precautions are not taken.

    NOTE!

    Indicates the possibility of flawed results and damage to the equipment.

    1. Safety Instructions

    General

    The device has been manufactured using state-of-the-art technology and according to recognized safety standards. If used incorrectly or misused, however, it can cause
    • Injury or death to the operator or a third party
    • Damage to the device and other material assets belonging to the operating company
    • Inefficient operation of the equipment
    All persons involved in the commissioning, operation, maintenance, and servicing of the device must
    • Be suitably qualified
    • Have knowledge of welding
    • Have completely read and followed these Operating Instructions

    The Operating Instructions must always be at hand wherever the device is being used. In addition to the Operating Instructions, all applicable local rules and regulations regarding accident prevention and environmental protection must also be followed.

    All safety and danger notices on the device must
    • Be kept in a legible state
    • Not be damaged/marked
    • Not be removed
    • Not be covered, pasted, or painted over

    For the location of the safety and danger notices on the device, refer to the section headed "General" in the Operating Instructions for the device.
    Before switching on the device, remove any faults that could compromise safety.
    Your personal safety is at stake!

    1. Safety Instructions

    Intended Use

    The device is to be used exclusively for its intended purpose.

    The device is intended exclusively for the welding process specified on the rating plate.
    Utilization for any other purpose, or in any other manner, shall be deemed to be "not in accordance with the intended purpose." The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage resulting from improper use.

    Proper use also means
    • Completely reading and obeying all instructions in the Operating Instructions
    • Completely reading and obeying all safety instructions and danger notices
    • Carrying out all the specified inspection and servicing work
    Never use the device for the following applications:
    • Thawing pipes
    • Charging batteries
    • Starting motors

    The device is designed for operation in industry and business. The manufacture shall not be liable for any damage resulting from use in a living area.

    The manufacture shall also not be liable for faulty or incorrect work results.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Grid Connection

    Devices with a high output can influence the energy quality of the grid due to their current consumption.

    This may affect a number of device types in terms of:
    • connection restrictions
    • criteria regarding maximum permissible grid impedance *)
    • criteria regarding the minimum required short-circuit power *)

    *) both at the interface with the public grid
    See technical data

    In this case, the operator or the person using the device should check whether or not the device is allowed to be connected, where appropriate through discussion with the power supply company.

    IMPORTANT! Ensure secure grounding of the grid connection!

    1. Safety Instructions

    Environmental Conditions

    Operation or storage of the device outside the stipulated area will be deemed as not in accordance with the intended purpose. The manufacturer accepts no liability for any damage resulting from improper use.

    Temperature range of the ambient air:
    • During operation: -10°C to +40°C (14°F to 104°F)
    • During transport and storage: -20°C to +55°C (-4°F to 131°F)
    Relative humidity:
    • Up to 50% at 40°C (104°F)
    • Up to 90% at 20°C (68°F)

    Ambient air: free of dust, acids, corrosive gases or substances, etc.
    Altitude above sea level: up to 2000 m (6561 ft. 8.16 in.)

    1. Safety Instructions

    Obligations of the Operating Company

    The operating company must only allow persons to work with the device if they
    • Are familiar with the basic occupational safety and accident prevention regulations and are trained in handling the device
    • Have read and understood these Operating Instructions, especially the section "Safety Rules," and have confirmed this with their signature
    • Are trained according to the requirements for the work results

    The safety-conscious work of the personnel must be checked regularly.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Obligations of Personnel

    All persons who are assigned to work with the device must do the following before beginning the work:
    • Follow the basic regulations for occupational safety and accident prevention
    • Read these Operating Instructions, especially the section "Safety Rules," and confirm that they have understood and will follow them by signing

    Before leaving the workplace, ensure that no personal injury or property damage can occur in one's absence.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Residual current circuit breaker

    Local regulations and national guidelines may mean that a residual current circuit breaker is required when connecting a device to the public grid.
    The residual current circuit breaker recommended for the device by the manufacturer can be found in the technical data.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Personal Protection and Protection of Others

    You are exposed to numerous hazards while handling the device, for example:
    • Flying sparks and pieces of hot metal
    • Arc radiation that poses a risk of injury to the eyes and skin
    • Hazardous electromagnetic fields that pose a risk of death for individuals with pacemakers
    • Electrical risks from grid current and welding current
    • Increased noise exposure
    • Harmful welding fumes and gases
    Wear suitable protective clothing when dealing with the device. The protective clothing must have the following properties:
    • Flame resistant
    • Insulating and dry
    • Covering the entire body and in good condition with no damage
    • Safety helmet
    • Cuffless pants
    Protective clothing involves the following:
    • Protecting the face and eyes from UV radiation, heat and flying sparks with a face guard featuring a regulation-compliant filter
    • Wearing regulation-compliant protective goggles with side protection behind the face guard
    • Wearing rigid, wet-insulating footwear
    • Protecting hands with appropriate gloves (featuring electrical insulation and thermal protection)
    • Wearing ear protection to reduce noise exposure and protect against injury
    Keep persons, especially children, away during the operation of the devices and during the welding process. If persons are in the vicinity, however:
    • Instruct them about all hazards (blinding hazard due to arcs, risk of injury from flying sparks, welding fumes hazardous to health, noise exposure, possible hazard due to grid current or welding current, etc.)
    • Provide suitable protective equipment or
    • Construct suitable protective walls and curtains.
    1. Safety Instructions

    Data on noise emission values

    The device produces a maximum noise level of <80 dB(A) (ref. 1pW) when idling and in the cooling phase following operation in relation to the maximum permitted operating point at standard loading in accordance with EN 60974-1.

    A workplace-specific emission value for welding (and cutting) cannot be specified because this value depends on the welding process and the environmental conditions. It is influenced by a wide range of parameters, such as the welding process itself (MIG/MAG, TIG welding), the selected current type (direct current, alternating current), the power range, the type of weld metal, the resonance properties of the workpiece, the workplace environment, and many other factors.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Danger from toxic gases and vapors

    The fumes produced during welding contain toxic gases and vapors.

    Welding fumes contain substances that cause cancer, as stated in monograph 118 from the International Agency for Research on Cancer.

    Use at-source extraction source and a room extraction system.
    If possible, use a welding torch with an integrated extraction device.

    Keep your head out of the welding fumes and gases.

    Take the following precautionary measures for fumes and harmful gases:
    • Do not breathe them in.
    • Extract them from the work area using appropriate equipment.

    Ensure that there is a sufficient supply of fresh air. Ensure that there is a ventilation flow rate of at least 20 m³ per hour.

    Use a welding helmet with air supply if there is insufficient ventilation.

    If there is uncertainty as to whether the extraction capacity is sufficient, compare the measured toxic emission values against the permissible limit values.

    The following components are factors that determine how toxic the welding fumes are:
    • The metals used for the workpiece
    • Electrodes
    • Coatings
    • Cleaning agents, degreasers, and the like
    • The welding process used

    Consult the corresponding material safety data sheets and manufacturer's instructions for the components listed above.

    Recommendations for exposure scenarios, risk management measures and identifying working conditions can be found on the European Welding Association website under Health & Safety (https://european-welding.org).

    Keep flammable vapors (such as solvent vapors) out of the arc radiation range.

    When no welding is taking place, close the valve of the shielding gas cylinder or the main gas supply.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Danger from Flying Sparks

    Flying sparks can cause fires and explosions.

    Never undertake welding near flammable materials.

    Flammable materials must be kept at least 11 meters (36 ft. 1.07 in.) from the arc or protected with a certified cover.

    Keep suitable, tested fire extinguishers on hand.

    Sparks and pieces of hot metal may also get into surrounding areas through small cracks and openings. Take appropriate measures to ensure that there is no risk of injury or fire.

    Do not undertake welding in areas at risk of fire and explosion, or on sealed tanks, drums, or pipes if these have not been prepared in accordance with corresponding national and international standards.

    Do not undertake welding on containers in which gases, fuels, mineral oils, and the like are/were stored. Residues pose a risk of explosion.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Risks from mains current and welding current

    An electric shock can be fatal.

    Do not touch voltage-carrying parts inside or outside the device.

    During MIG/MAG welding and TIG welding, the welding wire, the wire spool, the feed rollers, as well as all pieces of metal that are in contact with the welding wire, are live.

    Always place the wirefeeder on a sufficiently insulated base or use a suitable insulating wirefeeder holder.

    Ensure suitable personal protection with dry temporary backing or cover with sufficient insulation against the ground potential. The temporary backing or cover must completely cover the entire area between the body and the ground potential.

    All cables and leads must be secured, undamaged, insulated, and adequately dimensioned. Replace loose connections and scorched, damaged, or inadequately dimensioned cables and leads immediately.
    Before every use, check power connections for secure fit by hand.
    In the case of power cables with bayonet connectors, turn the power cable by at least 180° around the longitudinal axis and pretension.

    Do not wrap cables or leads around your body or parts of the body.

    Concerning the electrode (stick electrode, tungsten electrode, welding wire, etc.)
    • Never immerse it in liquids to cool it
    • Never touch it when the welding system is switched on

    The open circuit voltage of a welding system may double, for example, between the electrodes of two welding systems. Touching the potentials of both electrodes at the same time may be life-threatening in some cases.

    Have the grid and device supply lead regularly inspected by an electrician to ensure that the ground conductor is functioning properly.

    Protection class I devices require a grid with a ground conductor and a connector system with ground conductor contact for proper operation.

    Operation of the device on a grid without a ground conductor and on a socket without a ground conductor contact is only permitted if all national regulations for protective separation are observed.
    Otherwise, this is considered gross negligence. The manufacturer accepts no liability for any damage resulting from improper use.

    Use suitable equipment to ensure that the workpiece is sufficiently grounded if necessary.

    Switch off unused devices.

    When working at elevated heights, wear a safety harness to prevent falls.

    Before working on the device, switch off the device and remove the mains plug.

    Secure the device to prevent the mains plug from being connected and switched on again by applying a clearly legible and understandable warning sign.

    After opening the device:
    • Discharge all electrically charged components
    • Ensure that all components are disconnected from the power supply

    If work is needed on voltage-carrying parts, bring in a second person who will switch off the main switch at the correct time.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Stray welding currents

    If the following instructions are not observed, stray welding currents may occur, which pose a risk of the following:
    • Fire
    • Overheating of parts connected to the workpiece
    • Irreparable damage to ground conductors
    • Damage to the device and other electrical equipment

    Ensure that the workpiece clamp is securely connected to the workpiece.

    Secure the workpiece clamp as close to the spot to be welded as possible.

    Position the device with sufficient insulation against electrically conductive environments, e.g., insulation against electrically conductive floors or electrically conductive mounts.

    Observe the following when using power distribution boards, twin-head mounts, etc.: Even the electrode of the welding torch/electrode holder not in use carries electric potential. Ensure that there is sufficient insulation when the unused welding torch/electrode holder is stored.

    In automated MIG/MAG applications, only guide the wire electrode from the welding wire drum, large spool, or wirespool to the wirefeeder with insulation.

    1. Safety Instructions

    EMC Device Classifications

    Devices in emission class A:
    • Are only designed for use in industrial settings
    • Can cause line-bound and radiated interference in other areas
    Devices in emission class B:
    • Satisfy the emissions criteria for residential and industrial areas. This is also true for residential areas in which the energy is supplied from the public low-voltage grid.

    EMC device classification as per the rating plate or technical data.

    1. Safety Instructions

    EMC measures

    In certain cases, even though a device complies with the standard limit values for emissions, it may affect the application area for which it was designed (e.g., when there is sensitive equipment at the same location, or if the site where the device is installed is close to either radio or television receivers).
    If this is the case, then the operating company is obliged to take appropriate action to rectify the situation.

    Test and assess the immunity of equipment in the vicinity of the device in accordance with national and international provisions. Examples of interference-prone equipment that could be affected by the device:
    • Safety devices
    • Grid power lines, signal lines, and data transfer lines
    • IT and telecommunications equipment
    • Devices for measuring and calibrating
    Supporting measures to avoid EMC problems:
    1. Grid power supply
      • If electromagnetic interference occurs despite a grid connection that complies with regulations, take additional measures (e.g., use a suitable grid filter).
    2. Welding power-leads
      • Keep them as short as possible
      • Route them close together (also to avoid EMF problems)
      • Route them far from other lines
    3. Equipotential bonding
    4. Workpiece grounding
      • If necessary, establish grounding using suitable capacitors.
    5. Shield, if necessary
      • Shield other devices in the vicinity
      • Shield the entire welding installation
    1. Safety Instructions

    EMF measures

    Electromagnetic fields may cause health problems that are not yet known:
    • Effects on the health of persons close by, e.g., those with pacemakers and hearing aids
    • Persons with pacemakers must seek advice from their doctor before staying in the immediate vicinity of the device and the welding process
    • Keep distances between welding power-leads and the head/torso of the welder as great as possible for safety reasons
    • Do not carry welding power-leads and hosepacks over your shoulder or wrap them around your body or body parts
    1. Safety Instructions

    Particular hazard areas

    Keep hands, hair, loose clothing, and tools away from moving parts such as:
    • Fans
    • Gears
    • Rollers
    • Shafts
    • Wirespools and welding wires

    Do not reach into rotating gears of the wire drive or into rotating drive parts.

    Covers and side panels must only be opened/removed during maintenance and repair work.

    During operation
    • Ensure that all covers are closed, and all side parts have been mounted properly.
    • Keep all covers and side parts closed.

    The protrusion of welding wire from the welding torch represents a high risk of injury (cuts to the hand, facial and eye injuries, etc.).

    Therefore, always hold the welding torch away from the body (devices with wirefeeder) and use suitable protective goggles.

    Do not touch the workpiece during or after welding – risk of burns.

    Slag may fly off cooling workpieces. Therefore, also wear regulation-compliant protective equipment when reworking workpieces and ensure that other persons are sufficiently protected.

    Leave the welding torch and other parts with a high operating temperature to cool before working on them.

    Special regulations apply in areas at risk of fire or explosion
    – follow the appropriate national and international regulations.

    Welding machines for work in areas with increased electrical hazard (e.g., boilers) must be labeled with the symbol (Safety). However, the welding machine may not be located in such areas.

    Risk of scalding due to leaking coolant. Switch off the cooling unit before disconnecting connections for the coolant supply or return.

    When handling coolant, observe the information on the coolant safety data sheet. The coolant safety data sheet can be obtained from your service center or via the manufacturer's website.

    Only use suitable load-carrying equipment from the manufacturer to transport devices by crane.

    • Attach chains or ropes to all designated attachments of the suitable load-carrying equipment.
    • Chains or ropes must be the smallest angle possible from vertical.
    • Remove gas cylinder and wirefeeder (MIG/MAG and TIG devices).

    In the event of crane attachment of the wirefeeder during welding, always use a suitable, insulating wirefeeder hoisting attachment (MIG/MAG and TIG devices).

    If the device is equipped with a carrier strap or handle, then this is used exclusively for transport by hand. The carrier strap is not suitable for transport by crane, counterbalanced lift truck, or other mechanical lifting tools.

    All lifting equipment (straps, buckles, chains, etc.), which is used in association with the device or its components, must be checked regularly (e.g., for mechanical damage, corrosion, or changes due to other environmental influences).
    The test interval and scope must at least comply with the respective valid national standards and guidelines.

    There is a risk of colorless, odorless shielding gas escaping without notice if an adapter is used for the shielding gas connection. Use suitable Teflon tape to seal the thread of the shielding gas connection adapter on the device side before installation.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Requirement for the shielding gas

    Especially with ring lines, contaminated shielding gas can cause damage to equipment and reduce welding quality.
    Meet the following requirements regarding shielding gas quality:
    • Solid particle size < 40 µm
    • Pressure condensation point < -20 °C
    • Max. oil content < 25 mg/m³

    Use filters if necessary.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Danger from Shielding Gas Cylinders

    Shielding gas cylinders contain compressed gas and may explode if damaged. Shielding gas cylinders are an integral part of the welding equipment, so they must be handled very carefully.

    Protect shielding gas cylinders with compressed gas from excessive heat, mechanical impact, slag, open flames, sparks, and arcs.

    Mount the shielding gas cylinders vertically and secure them in accordance with instructions so they cannot fall over.

    Keep shielding gas cylinders away from welding or other electrical circuits.

    Never hang a welding torch on a shielding gas cylinder.

    Never touch a shielding gas cylinder with an electrode.

    Risk of explosion: Never weld on a compressed shielding gas cylinder.

    Always use suitable shielding gas cylinders for the application in question and the correct matching accessories (controller, hoses, and fittings, etc.) Only use shielding gas cylinders and accessories that are in good condition.

    If a valve on a shielding gas cylinder is open, turn your face away from the outlet.

    When no welding is taking place, close the valve of the shielding gas cylinder.

    Leave the cap on the valve of the shielding gas cylinder when the cylinder is not connected.

    Follow the manufacturer's instructions and applicable national and international provisions for shielding gas cylinders and accessories.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Danger Posed by Shielding Gas Leak

    Risk of asphyxiation due to uncontrolled shielding gas leak

    Shielding gas is colorless and odorless and may suppress the oxygen in the ambient air in the event of leakage.

    • Ensure there is a sufficient supply of fresh air with a ventilation flow rate of at least 20 m³ per hour.
    • Please observe the safety and maintenance information for the shielding gas cylinder or the main gas supply.
    • When no welding is taking place, close the valve of the shielding gas cylinder or the main gas supply.
    • Always check the shielding gas cylinder or main gas supply for uncontrolled gas leakage before each start-up.
    1. Safety Instructions

    Safety Measures at the Setup Location and during Transport

    A toppling device can be deadly! Set up the device securely on an even, solid surface
    • The maximum permitted tilt angle is 10°.
    Special regulations apply in areas at risk of fire or explosion
    • Follow the appropriate national and international regulations.

    Use instructions and checks within the company to ensure that the vicinity of the workplace is always clean and organized.

    Only set up and operate the device in accordance with the protection class shown on the rating plate.

    When setting up the device, ensure that there is an all-round clearance of 0.5 m (1 ft. 7.69 in.) to allow cooling air to circulate unhindered.

    Take care to ensure that the applicable national and regional guidelines and accident prevention regulations are observed when transporting the device, especially guidelines concerning hazards during transport and shipment.

    Do not lift or transport any active devices. Switch off and disconnect devices from the grid before transport or lifting.

    Before transporting a welding system (e.g., with a trolley, cooling unit, welding machine, and wirefeeder), completely drain the coolant and dismantle the following components:
    • Wirefeeder
    • Wire spool
    • shielding gas cylinder

    It is essential to conduct a visual inspection of the device to check for damage after it has been transported but before commissioning. Have any damage repaired by trained service technicians before commissioning the device.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Safety Measures in Normal Operation

    Only operate the device when all safety devices are fully functional. If the safety devices are not fully functional, there is a danger of:
    • Injury or death to the operator or a third party
    • Damage to the device and other material assets belonging to the operating company
    • Inefficient operation of the device

    Safety devices that are not fully functional must be repaired before the device is switched on.

    Never bypass or disable safety devices.

    Before switching on the device, ensure that no one can be put in danger.

    The device must be examined at least once a week for externally detectable damage and functionality of the safety devices.

    Always secure the shielding gas cylinder well and remove before transporting by crane.

    Only the original coolant from the manufacturer is suitable for use in our devices due to its properties (electrical conductivity, anti-freeze, material compatibility, flammability, etc.)

    Only use appropriate original coolant from the manufacturer.

    Do not mix original coolant from the manufacturer with other coolants.

    Only connect system components from the manufacturer to the cooling unit circuit.

    If there is damage due to use of other system components or other coolants, the manufacturer accepts no liability for this and all warranty claims are forfeited.

    Cooling Liquid FCL 10/20 is not flammable. The ethanol-based coolant is flammable in certain conditions. Only transport the coolant in closed original containers and keep away from sources of ignition.

    Properly dispose of used coolant according to national and international regulations. The coolant safety data sheet can be obtained from your service center or via the manufacturer’s website.

    When the system is cool, always check the coolant level before starting welding.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Maintenance and repair

    It is impossible to guarantee that bought-in parts are designed and manufactured to meet the demands made of them, or that they satisfy safety requirements.

    • Use only original spare and wearing parts (also applies to standard parts).
    • Do not carry out any modifications, alterations, etc. to the device without the manufacturer's consent.
    • Components that are not in perfect condition must be replaced immediately.
    • When ordering, please give the exact designation and part number as shown in the spare parts list, as well as the serial number of your device.

    The housing screws provide the ground conductor connection for earthing the housing parts.
    Only use original housing screws in the correct number and tightened to the specified torque.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Safety inspection

    The manufacturer recommends that a safety inspection of the device be performed at least every 12 months.

    The manufacturer recommends calibrating welding systems within the same 12-month interval.

    A safety inspection by a certified electrician is recommended:
    • After changes
    • After alterations
    • After repair, service, and maintenance
    • At least every twelve months

    For the safety inspection, follow the appropriate national and international standards and guidelines.

    You can obtain more information about the safety inspection and calibration from your service center. The service center will provide the necessary documents upon request.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Disposal

    Waste electrical and electronic equipment must be collected separately and recycled in an environmentally sound manner in accordance with the European Directive and national law. Used equipment must be returned to the distributor or through a local authorized collection and disposal system. Proper disposal of the used device promotes sustainable recycling of material resources. Failure to observe this may lead to potential health/environmental impacts.

    Packaging materials
    Separate collection. Check your municipality’s regulations. Reduce the volume of the box.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Safety symbols

    Devices with the CE label satisfy the essential requirements of the low-voltage and electromagnetic compatibility directive (e.g., relevant product standards of the EN 60974 series).

    Fronius International GmbH declares that the device complies with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU Declaration of Conformity is available on the following website: http://www.fronius.com

    Devices marked with the CSA test mark satisfy the requirements of the relevant standards for Canada and the USA.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Data backup

    The user is responsible for backing up any changes made to the factory settings. The manufacturer accepts no liability for any deleted personal settings.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Copyright

    Copyright of these Operating Instructions remains with the manufacturer.

    Text and illustrations were accurate at the time of printing. Fronius reserves the right to make changes. The contents of the Operating Instructions shall not provide the basis for any claims whatsoever on the part of the purchaser. If you have any suggestions for improvement, or can point out any mistakes that you have found in the Operating Instructions, we will be most grateful for your comments.

    1. Safety Instructions

    Intended use

    The device is to be used exclusively for its intended purpose.

    The device is intended exclusively for the welding process specified on the rating plate and in the Operating Instructions.
    Utilization for any other purpose, or in any other manner, shall be deemed to be "not in accordance with the intended purpose." The manufacturer accepts no liability for any damage resulting from improper use.

    Intended use also means
    • Reading and adhering to all instructions in the Operating Instructions
    • Carefully reading and obeying all safety instructions and danger notices
    • Carrying out all the specified inspection and maintenance work.
    Never use the device for the following applications:
    • Thawing pipes
    • Charging batteries
    • Starting motors

    The device is designed for operation in commercial applications. The manufacturer shall not be liable for any damage resulting from use in a living area.

    The manufacturer shall also not be liable for faulty or incorrect work results.

    General information

    General

    Device concept

    iWave 300i / 400i / 500i DC and iWave 300i / 400i / 500i AC/DC welding machines

    The iWave 300i / 400i / 500i DC and iWave 300i / 400i / 500i AC/DC welding machines are fully digitized, microprocessor-controlled inverter welding machiness.

    A modular design and easy ability to extend the system guarantee a high degree of flexibility. The devices can be adapted to any situation.

    1. General information

    General

    Device concept

    iWave 300i / 400i / 500i DC and iWave 300i / 400i / 500i AC/DC welding machines

    The iWave 300i / 400i / 500i DC and iWave 300i / 400i / 500i AC/DC welding machines are fully digitized, microprocessor-controlled inverter welding machiness.

    A modular design and easy ability to extend the system guarantee a high degree of flexibility. The devices can be adapted to any situation.

    1. General information
    2. General

    Device concept

    iWave 300i / 400i / 500i DC and iWave 300i / 400i / 500i AC/DC welding machines

    The iWave 300i / 400i / 500i DC and iWave 300i / 400i / 500i AC/DC welding machines are fully digitized, microprocessor-controlled inverter welding machiness.

    A modular design and easy ability to extend the system guarantee a high degree of flexibility. The devices can be adapted to any situation.

    1. General information
    2. General

    Power source = welding machine

    Depending on the existing device firmware, "power source" may still be shown on the display in some cases.

    Power source = welding machine

    1. General information
    2. General

    Operating principle

    The central control and regulation unit of the welding machines is coupled with a digital signal processor. The central control and regulation unit and signal processor control the entire welding process.
    During the welding process, the actual data is measured continuously and the device responds immediately to any changes. Rule algorithms ensure that the desired target state is maintained.

    This results in:
    • A precise welding process
    • Exact reproducibility of all results
    • Excellent weld properties
    1. General information
    2. General

    Application areas

    The devices are used in commercial and industrial applications for manual and automated TIG and MIG/MAG welding of unalloyed and low-alloyed steel, high-alloyed chrome/nickel steel, aluminum, aluminum alloys, and magnesium. The welding machines are designed for:

    • Automotive and supply industry,
    • Mechanical engineering and rail vehicle manufacturing,
    • Chemical plant construction,
    • Machine construction,
    • Shipyards,
    • etc.
    1. General information
    2. General

    Conformities

    FCC
    This device conforms to the limit values for an EMC device class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC regulations. These limit values are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when operating in a commercial environment. This device generates and uses high-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Operating Instructions, may interfere with radio communications.
    Operation of this device in residential areas is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user is required to correct the interference at his own expense.

    FCC ID: QKWSPBMCU2

    Industry Canada RSS
    This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

    (1)
    The device must not cause any harmful interference.
    (2)
    The device must not be affected by external sources of interference, including interference that may impair operation.

    IC: 12270A-SPBMCU2

    EU
    Compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU - Radio Equipment Directive (RED)

    The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed in such a way that a minimum distance of 20 cm from all persons is maintained. They must not be installed or operated in conjunction with another antenna or transmitter. OEM integrators and end users must ensure the operating conditions of the transmitter comply with radio frequency exposure guidelines.

    ANATEL / Brazil
    This device is operated on a secondary basis. It does not claim to offer protection against harmful interference, even from devices of the same type.
    This device can not cause interference in primarily operated systems.
    This device complies with ANATEL's specific absorption rate limit values for exposure to high-frequency electrical, magnetic, and electromagnetic fields.

    IFETEL / Mexico
    Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions:

    (1)
    The device must not cause any harmful interference;
    (2)
    The device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

    NCC / Taiwan
    According to the NCC regulations for low-power equipment that generates radio frequency radiation:

    Article 12
    Certified low-power equipment that generates radio frequency radiation shall not change frequency, increase power or alter the characteristics and functions of the original design without approval.

    Article 14
    The use of low-power equipment that generates radio frequency radiation shall not adversely affect flight safety and legally operated communication equipment.
    An identified malfunction must be deactivated and corrected immediately. All malfunctions must be eliminated.
    The legal notice in the preceding paragraph refers to radio communications equipment operated in accordance with the provisions of the Telecommunications Act. Low-power equipment that generates radio frequency radiation must be able to withstand interference from legally operated communication channels or radiological, radiation electrical devices used in industrial, scientific and medical applications.

    Thailand

    1. General information
    2. General

    Bluetooth trademarks

    The word mark Bluetooth® and the Bluetooth® logos are registered trademarks and property of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and are used by the manufacturer under license. Other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective owners.

    1. General information
    2. General

    Warning notices on the device

    Warning notices and safety symbols can be found on welding machines with the CSA test mark for use in the North American region (USA and Canada). These warning notices and safety symbols must not be removed or painted over. They warn against incorrect operation, as this may result in serious injury and property damage.

    Safety symbols on the rating plate:

    Welding is dangerous. The following basic requirements must be met:

    • Adequate welding qualifications
    • Appropriate protective equipment
    • Exclusion of unauthorized persons

    Do not use the functions described here until you have fully read and understood the following documents:

    • These Operating Instructions
    • All system component Operating Instructions, especially the safety rules
    1. General information
    2. General

    Options

    WP TIG DynamicWire
    The Welding Package enables the TIG DynamicWire process.

    OPT/i TIG gas regulator

    OPT/i TIG 4 Switch SpeedNet
    Option if more than one additional SpeedNet connection is required.

    OPT/i TIG Gas flow rate sensor

    OPT/i TIG external sensor

    OPT/i TIG PowerConnector
    2. Current socket on the rear of the welding machine

    OPT/i TIG Gas changeover

    OPT/i TIG 2nd SpeedNet
    Second SpeedNet connection

    OPT/i TIG DC Multiprocess PRO

    OPT/i TIG AC Multiprocess PRO

    OPT/i TIG 2nd NT242
    When using a CU 1400 cooling unit, the OPT/i TIG 2nd NT242 option must be installed in the welding machines.

    OPT/i TIG NT601

    OPT/i TPS dust filter

    IMPORTANT! The use of the OPT/i TPS dust filter option on iWave welding machines will reduce the duty cycle!

    OPT/i CycleTIG
    Advanced TIG stitch welding

    OPT/i Synergic Lines *
    Option to enable all available special characteristics of TPSi welding machines;
    any special characteristics created in the future are thus automatically enabled.

    OPT/i GUN Trigger *
    Option for special functions in connection with the torch trigger

    OPT/i Jobs
    Option for Job Mode

    OPT/i Documentation
    Option for the documentation function

    OPT/i Puls Pro

    OPT/i Interface Designer *
    Option for individual interface configuration

    OPT/i WebJobEdit
    Option to edit jobs via the SmartManager of the welding machine

    OPT/i Limit Monitoring
    Option to set limit values for welding current, welding voltage, and wire speed

    OPT/i Custom NFC - ISO 14443A
    Option to use a custom frequency band for key cards

    OPT/i CMT Cycle Step *
    Option for adjustable, cyclic CMT welding process

    OPT/i OPC-UA
    Standardized data interface protocol

    OPT/i MQTT
    Standardized data interface protocol

    OPT/i SpeedNet Repeater
    Signal amplifier if interconnecting hosepacks or connections from welding machine to wirefeeder exceed 50 m

    KRIS 13 Gouging Machine
    Electrode holder with compressed air connection for arc air gouging

    OPT/i Wire Sense *
    Seam tracking / edge detection using wire electrode for automated applications
    only in conjunction with CMT hardware

    OPT/i Synchropulse 10 Hz *
    To increase the SynchroPulse frequency from 3 Hz to 10 Hz

     

    *
    MIG/MAG options—only in conjunction with the options OPT/i TIG DC Multiprocess PRO or OPT/i TIG AC Multiprocess PRO
    1. General information
    2. General

    OPT/i Safety Stop PL d option

    IMPORTANT! The OPT/i Safety Stop PL d safety function was developed as Category 3 according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008 + AC:2009.
    A two-channel feed-in of the input signal is required for this.
    Bridging the two-channel capability (e.g., by means of a short-circuit bracket) is not permitted and results in the loss of the PL d.

    Function overview

    The OPT/i Safety Stop PL d option ensures a safety stop of the PL d welding machine with a controlled end of welding in less than a second.
    Each time the welding machine is switched on, the Safety Stop PL d safety function performs a self-test.

    IMPORTANT! This self-test must be performed at least once a year to check the function of the safety cut-out.

    If the voltage drops at least one of two inputs, the Safety Stop PL d stops the current welding operation; the wirefeeder motor and the welding voltage is switched off.
    The welding machine outputs an error code. Communication via the robot interface or bus system continues.
    In order to restart the welding system, the voltage must be applied again. An error must be acknowledged via the torch trigger, display or interface and the start of welding must be executed again.

    A non-simultaneous shutdown of the two inputs (> 750 ms) is output by the system as a critical, non-acknowledgeable error.
    The welding machine remains permanently switched off.
    A reset is performed by switching the welding machine off/on.

    Operating controls, connections and mechanical components

    Control Panel

    General

    NOTE!

    Because of firmware updates, certain functions may be available for your device but not described in these Operating Instructions or vice versa.

    In addition, individual figures may also differ slightly from the operating elements of your device. These operating elements function in exactly the same way, however.

    WARNING!

    Operating the device incorrectly can cause serious injury and damage to property.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have fully read and understood the Operating Instructions.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have fully read and understood all of the Operating Instructions for the system components, especially the safety rules.

    1. Operating controls, connections and mechanical components

    Control Panel

    General

    NOTE!

    Because of firmware updates, certain functions may be available for your device but not described in these Operating Instructions or vice versa.

    In addition, individual figures may also differ slightly from the operating elements of your device. These operating elements function in exactly the same way, however.

    WARNING!

    Operating the device incorrectly can cause serious injury and damage to property.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have fully read and understood the Operating Instructions.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have fully read and understood all of the Operating Instructions for the system components, especially the safety rules.

    1. Operating controls, connections and mechanical components
    2. Control Panel

    General

    NOTE!

    Because of firmware updates, certain functions may be available for your device but not described in these Operating Instructions or vice versa.

    In addition, individual figures may also differ slightly from the operating elements of your device. These operating elements function in exactly the same way, however.

    WARNING!

    Operating the device incorrectly can cause serious injury and damage to property.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have fully read and understood the Operating Instructions.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have fully read and understood all of the Operating Instructions for the system components, especially the safety rules.

    1. Operating controls, connections and mechanical components
    2. Control Panel

    Control panel

    43,0001,3547
    No.Function
    (1)
    USB port
    For connecting USB thumb drives (service dongle, license key, etc.).
    IMPORTANT! The USB port is not electrically isolated from the welding circuit. Devices that make an electrical connection to another device must therefore not be connected to the USB port!
    (2)
    Dial with rotary/push button function
    For selecting elements, setting values, and scrolling through lists
    (3)
    Display (with touch function)
    • For direct operation of the welding machine by touching the display
    • For displaying values
    • For navigating through the menu
    (4)
    Reading zone for NFC keys
    • For locking/unlocking the welding machine using NFC keys
    • For logging in different users (with active user management and assigned NFC keys)
    NFC key = NFC card or NFC key fob
    (5)
    Wire-threading button
    For threading the wire electrode / welding wire into the torch hosepack without gas or current
    (6)
    Gas-test button
    To set the required quantity of gas on the gas pressure regulator.
    After pressing the gas-test button, gas flows for 30 s. Pressing the button again ends the process early.
    1. Operating controls, connections and mechanical components
    2. Control Panel

    Input options

    Touching the display

    When you touch and thus select an element on the display, the element is highlighted.

    Turning the dial

    • Select items on the display
    • Change values

    For some parameters, a value that has been changed by turning the dial is automatically applied without having to press the dial.

    Pressing the dial

    • Apply selected elements, e.g., to change the value of a welding parameter.
    • Apply values of specific parameters.

    Pressing the buttons

    By pressing the wire threading key, the wire electrode or the welding wire is threaded into the torch hosepack without gas or current.
    An animated graphic with motor current, motor power, and wire length conveyed is shown on the display.

    Pressing the gas-test button releases gas for 30 s. Pressing it again ends the process prematurely.
    The display shows an animated graphic with the remaining gas flow duration.

    1. Operating controls, connections and mechanical components

    Display

    Display

    iWave welding machine display
    No.Function
    (1)
    Status bar
    Contains information about:
    • Currently selected welding process
    • Currently selected operating mode
    • Currently selected polarity
    • Currently selected ignition procedure
    • Cap mode
    • Pulse mode
    • Electrode overload
    • Bluetooth status indicator
    • Currently logged in user (when user management is activated)
      or
      the key symbol when the welding machine is switched off (e.g., if profile/role "locked" is activated)
    • Time and date
    The content of the status bar varies according to the selected welding process.

    NOTE!

    The following functions can be selected and set directly in the status bar:

    Welding process
    Operating mode

    Touch the desired function in the status bar and set it in the window that opens.

    Select the welding process via the status bar, select the operating mode via the status bar
    (2)
    Left menu bar
    The left menu bar contains the menus:
    • Welding
    • Welding process
    • Process parameters
    • Defaults
    The left menu bar is operated by touching the display.
    (3)
    Indicator bar
    Overview of the currently available welding parameters;
    the individual welding parameters can be selected directly by touching the display. The currently selected parameter is highlighted in blue.
    Welding current curve symbol
    Welding current curve
    Balance symbol
    Balance (1)
    Electrode diameter symbol(s)
    Electrode diameter
    Cap mode symbol
    Cap mode (1)
    Polarity symbol
    Polarity (1)
    (1) only with iWave AC/DC welding machines
    (2) only with iWave AC/DC welding machines and if polarity is set to AC.
    (4)
    Main area
    The main area displays welding parameters, EasyJobs, graphics, lists or navigation elements. The main area is divided up differently depending on the application and populated with elements.
    The main area is operated
    • via the dial
    • by touching the display
    (5)
    Right menu bar
    The right menu bar can be used as follows, depending on the menu selected in the left menu bar:
    • As a function bar, consisting of application and function buttons
    • To navigate to the 2nd menu level
    The right menu bar is operated by touching the display.
    1. Operating controls, connections and mechanical components
    2. Display

    Display

    iWave welding machine display
    No.Function
    (1)
    Status bar
    Contains information about:
    • Currently selected welding process
    • Currently selected operating mode
    • Currently selected polarity
    • Currently selected ignition procedure
    • Cap mode
    • Pulse mode
    • Electrode overload
    • Bluetooth status indicator
    • Currently logged in user (when user management is activated)
      or
      the key symbol when the welding machine is switched off (e.g., if profile/role "locked" is activated)
    • Time and date
    The content of the status bar varies according to the selected welding process.

    NOTE!

    The following functions can be selected and set directly in the status bar:

    Welding process
    Operating mode

    Touch the desired function in the status bar and set it in the window that opens.

    Select the welding process via the status bar, select the operating mode via the status bar
    (2)
    Left menu bar
    The left menu bar contains the menus:
    • Welding
    • Welding process
    • Process parameters
    • Defaults
    The left menu bar is operated by touching the display.
    (3)
    Indicator bar
    Overview of the currently available welding parameters;
    the individual welding parameters can be selected directly by touching the display. The currently selected parameter is highlighted in blue.
    Welding current curve symbol
    Welding current curve
    Balance symbol
    Balance (1)
    Electrode diameter symbol(s)
    Electrode diameter
    Cap mode symbol
    Cap mode (1)
    Polarity symbol
    Polarity (1)
    (1) only with iWave AC/DC welding machines
    (2) only with iWave AC/DC welding machines and if polarity is set to AC.
    (4)
    Main area
    The main area displays welding parameters, EasyJobs, graphics, lists or navigation elements. The main area is divided up differently depending on the application and populated with elements.
    The main area is operated
    • via the dial
    • by touching the display
    (5)
    Right menu bar
    The right menu bar can be used as follows, depending on the menu selected in the left menu bar:
    • As a function bar, consisting of application and function buttons
    • To navigate to the 2nd menu level
    The right menu bar is operated by touching the display.
    1. Operating controls, connections and mechanical components
    2. Display

    Switching to full screen

    1

    The display is shown in full screen mode:

    2Exit full screen mode:

    NOTE!

    Hiding the EasyJobs realizes the optimal full-screen display:

    Defaults / View / EasyJobs / EasyJobs Off

    With a few defaults and the setting options via the status bar, the welding machine can be fully operated in manual applications in full-screen mode.

    1. Operating controls, connections and mechanical components
    2. Display

    Next page - previous page

    NOTE!

    Depending on the device type, equipment, and available WeldingPackages, the number and sequence of the displayed parameters may vary.

    If there are more than six parameters in a menu, the parameters are divided into several pages.
    Navigation between several pages is done using the "Next page" and "Previous page" buttons:

    Example: Process parameters / Common - Next page
    Example: Process parameters / Common - Previous page
    1. Operating controls, connections and mechanical components
    2. Display

    Animated graphics

    For certain parameters, animated graphics are shown on the display.
    These animated graphics change when the value of the parameter is changed.

    Example: Welding parameters for pulse correction -10 / 0 / +10
    Example: Process parameters / Process control / Penetration stabilizer 0 / 0.1 / 10.0
    1. Operating controls, connections and mechanical components
    2. Display

    Grayed-out welding parameters

    NOTE!

    In the menus, certain parameters are grayed out because they have no function with the currently selected settings.

    Grayed-out welding parameters can be selected and changed, but have no influence on the current welding process or the welding result.

    (a)
    Grayed-out parameter (e.g. penetration stabilizer)
    (b)
    Grayed-out parameter selected
    (c)
    Value of the grayed-out parameter is changed
    (d)
    Grayed-out parameter with changed value - no effect with current settings
    1. Operating controls, connections and mechanical components

    Connections, Switches, and Mechanical Components

    Connections and mechanical components

    Front/back
    No.Function
    (1)
    TMC connection
    • For connecting the control plug of the TIG welding torch
    • For connecting foot-operated remote controls
    • For connecting remote controls
    (2)
    (-) current socket with integrated gas connection
    For connecting the TIG welding torch
    Symbols:
    (3)
    TIG Multi Connector 4-pin connection
    For connecting a CrashBox line
    (4)
    Control panel with display and control panel cover
    For operating the welding machine
    (5)
    (-) Current socket with bayonet latch
    HF-free current socket for manual metal arc welding
    Symbols:
    (6)
    (+) Current socket
    For connecting the TIG return lead cable
    Symbols:
    (7)
    SpeedNet connection
    For connecting
    • remote controls and external sensors
    • wirefeeders (for automated applications)
    Symbol:
    (8)
    Mains cable with strain relief
    Depending on version
    (9)
    Power switch
    for switching the welding machine on and off
    (10)
    Dummy cover / Robot interface RI FB Inside /i or SpeedNet connections or External sensor options
    (11)
    Ethernet connection
    (12)
    Dummy cover/second (-) current socket with bayonet latch (option)
    MIG/MAG ground to wirefeeder
    (13)
    TIG shielding gas connection socket
    Main gas solenoid valve
    (14)
    Dummy cover/auxiliary gas connection
    Additional gas solenoid valve
    (15)
    Dummy cover/second SpeedNet connection (option) or external sensor (option)
    (16)
    Dummy cover/second SpeedNet connection (option) or external sensor (option)
    iWave 300i - 500i AC/DC
    (17)
    AC inverter
    (only with iWave AC/DC welding machines)
    1. Operating controls, connections and mechanical components
    2. Connections, Switches, and Mechanical Components

    Connections and mechanical components

    Front/back
    No.Function
    (1)
    TMC connection
    • For connecting the control plug of the TIG welding torch
    • For connecting foot-operated remote controls
    • For connecting remote controls
    (2)
    (-) current socket with integrated gas connection
    For connecting the TIG welding torch
    Symbols:
    (3)
    TIG Multi Connector 4-pin connection
    For connecting a CrashBox line
    (4)
    Control panel with display and control panel cover
    For operating the welding machine
    (5)
    (-) Current socket with bayonet latch
    HF-free current socket for manual metal arc welding
    Symbols:
    (6)
    (+) Current socket
    For connecting the TIG return lead cable
    Symbols:
    (7)
    SpeedNet connection
    For connecting
    • remote controls and external sensors
    • wirefeeders (for automated applications)
    Symbol:
    (8)
    Mains cable with strain relief
    Depending on version
    (9)
    Power switch
    for switching the welding machine on and off
    (10)
    Dummy cover / Robot interface RI FB Inside /i or SpeedNet connections or External sensor options
    (11)
    Ethernet connection
    (12)
    Dummy cover/second (-) current socket with bayonet latch (option)
    MIG/MAG ground to wirefeeder
    (13)
    TIG shielding gas connection socket
    Main gas solenoid valve
    (14)
    Dummy cover/auxiliary gas connection
    Additional gas solenoid valve
    (15)
    Dummy cover/second SpeedNet connection (option) or external sensor (option)
    (16)
    Dummy cover/second SpeedNet connection (option) or external sensor (option)
    iWave 300i - 500i AC/DC
    (17)
    AC inverter
    (only with iWave AC/DC welding machines)

    Before installation and initial operation

    Before installation and initial operation

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation and work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    All the work and functions described in this document must only be carried out by technically trained and qualified personnel.

    Read and understand this document in full.

    Read and understand all safety rules and user documentation for this equipment and all system components.

    1. Before installation and initial operation

    Before installation and initial operation

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation and work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    All the work and functions described in this document must only be carried out by technically trained and qualified personnel.

    Read and understand this document in full.

    Read and understand all safety rules and user documentation for this equipment and all system components.

    1. Before installation and initial operation
    2. Before installation and initial operation

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation and work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    All the work and functions described in this document must only be carried out by technically trained and qualified personnel.

    Read and understand this document in full.

    Read and understand all safety rules and user documentation for this equipment and all system components.

    1. Before installation and initial operation
    2. Before installation and initial operation

    Intended use

    The welding machine is only intended for TIG welding, MIG/MAG welding and MMA welding. Any other use is deemed to be "not in accordance with the intended purpose." The manufacturer shall not be liable for any damage resulting from such improper use.

    Intended use also means
    • Following all the instructions in these Operating Instructions
    • Carrying out all the specified inspection and maintenance work
    1. Before installation and initial operation
    2. Before installation and initial operation

    Setup regulations

    The device has been tested according to degree of protection IP23. This means:
    • Protection against solid foreign bodies larger than Ø 12.5 mm (0.49 in.)
    • Protection against spraywater at any angle up to 60° from the vertical

    The device can be set up and operated outdoors in accordance with protection class IP23. Direct moisture (e.g., from rain) must be avoided.

    WARNING!

    Danger from machines toppling over or falling.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Set up the device securely on an even, solid surface.

    Check all screw connections are tightly fastened after installation.

    The ventilation channel is a very important safety device. When selecting the setup location, ensure that the cooling air can enter or exit unhindered through the vents on the front and back. Any electrically conductive dust (e.g., from grinding work) must not be allowed to be sucked directly into the system.

    1. Before installation and initial operation
    2. Before installation and initial operation

    Mains connection

    • The devices are designed for the mains voltage stated on the rating plate.
    • Devices with a rated welding voltage of 3 x 575 V must be operated on three-phase systems with ground neutral.
    • If the mains cable or mains plug has not been attached to your version of the appliance, these must be installed by qualified personnel according to national standards.
    • The fuse protection of the mains lead is specified in the technical data.

    CAUTION!

    An inadequately dimensioned electrical installation can lead to serious damage to property.

    The mains lead and its fuse protection should be designed to suit the existing power supply.
    The technical data on the rating plate should be followed.

    1. Before installation and initial operation
    2. Before installation and initial operation

    Generator-powered operation

    The welding machine is generator-compatible.

    The maximum apparent power S1max of the welding machine must be known in order to select the correct generator output.
    The maximum apparent power S1max of the welding machine is calculated for 3-phase devices as follows:

    S1max = I1max x U1 x √3

    I1max and U1 according to the device rating plate and technical data

    The generator apparent power SGEN needed is calculated using the following rule of thumb:

    SGEN = S1max x 1.35

    A smaller generator can be used when not welding at full power.

    IMPORTANT! The generator apparent power SGEN must not be less than the maximum apparent power S1max of the welding machine!

    NOTE!

    The voltage delivered by the generator must never fall outside of the mains voltage tolerance range.

    The mains voltage tolerance is specified in the "Technical data" section.

    1. Before installation and initial operation

    Connecting the Mains Cable

    General

    If no mains cable is connected, a mains cable that is suitable for the connection voltage must be fitted before start-up.
    A universal strain-relief device for cable diameters of 12 - 30 mm (0.47 - 1.18 in.) is mounted on the welding machine.

    Strain-relief devices for other cable cross-sections must be designed accordingly.

    1. Before installation and initial operation
    2. Connecting the Mains Cable

    General

    If no mains cable is connected, a mains cable that is suitable for the connection voltage must be fitted before start-up.
    A universal strain-relief device for cable diameters of 12 - 30 mm (0.47 - 1.18 in.) is mounted on the welding machine.

    Strain-relief devices for other cable cross-sections must be designed accordingly.

    1. Before installation and initial operation
    2. Connecting the Mains Cable

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in severe personal injury and damage to property.

    The work described below may only be performed by trained specialist personnel.

    Follow national standards and guidelines.

    CAUTION!

    Danger from improperly prepared mains cable.

    Short circuits and damage to property may result.

    Fit ferrules to all phase conductors and the ground conductor of the stripped mains cable.

    1. Before installation and initial operation
    2. Connecting the Mains Cable

    Specified mains cable

    Europe:

    Welding machine
    Mains voltage

    Mains cable

    iWave 300i /nc DC
    3 x 400 V
    3 x 460 V


    H07RN-F 4G4
    H07RN-F 4G4

    iWave 300i /MV/nc DC
    3 x 200 - 230 V
    3 x 400 - 575 V


    H07RN-F 4G6
    H07RN-F 4G4

    iWave 300i /nc AC/DC
    3 x 400 V
    3 x 460 V


    H07RN-F 4G4
    H07RN-F 4G4

    iWave 300i /MV/nc AC/DC
    3 x 200 - 230 V
    3 x 400 - 575 V


    H07RN-F 4G6
    H07RN-F 4G4

    iWave 400i /nc DC
    3 x 400 V
    3 x 460 V


    H07RN-F 4G4
    H07RN-F 4G4

    iWave 400i /MV/nc DC
    3 x 200 - 230 V
    3 x 400 - 575 V


    H07RN-F 4G10
    H07RN-F 4G4

    iWave 400i /nc AC/DC
    3 x 400 V
    3 x 460 V


    H07RN-F 4G4
    H07RN-F 4G4

    iWave 400i /MV/nc AC/DC
    3 x 200 - 230 V
    3 x 400 - 575 V


    H07RN-F 4G10
    H07RN-F 4G4

    iWave 500i /nc DC
    3 x 400 V
    3 x 460 V


    H07RN-F 4G4
    H07RN-F 4G4

    iWave 500i /MV/nc DC
    3 x 200 - 230 V
    3 x 400 - 575 V


    H07RN-F 4G10
    H07RN-F 4G4

    iWave 500i /nc AC/DC
    3 x 400 V
    3 x 460 V


    H07RN-F 4G4
    H07RN-F 4G4

    iWave 500i /MV/nc AC/DC
    3 x 200 - 230 V
    3 x 400 - 575 V


    H07RN-F 4G10
    H07RN-F 4G4

    USA & Canada:

    Welding machine
    Mains voltage

    Mains cable

    iWave 300i /nc DC
    3 x 400 V
    3 x 460 V


    4 x AWG 10
    4 x AWG 10

    iWave 300i /MV/nc DC
    3 x 200 - 230 V
    3 x 400 - 575 V


    4 x AWG 8
    4 x AWG 10

    iWave 300i /nc AC/DC
    3 x 400 V
    3 x 460 V


    4 x AWG 10
    4 x AWG 10

    iWave 300i /MV/nc AC/DC
    3 x 200 - 230 V
    3 x 400 - 575 V


    4 x AWG 8
    4 x AWG 10

    iWave 400i /nc DC
    3 x 400 V
    3 x 460 V


    4 x AWG 10
    4 x AWG 10

    iWave 400i /MV/nc DC
    3 x 200 - 230 V
    3 x 400 - 575 V


    4 x AWG 6
    4 x AWG 10

    iWave 400i /nc AC/DC
    3 x 400 V
    3 x 460 V


    4 x AWG 10
    4 x AWG 10

    iWave 400i /MV/nc AC/DC
    3 x 200 - 230 V
    3 x 400 - 575 V


    4 x AWG 6
    4 x AWG 10

    iWave 500i /nc DC
    3 x 400 V
    3 x 460 V


    4 x AWG 8
    4 x AWG 8

    iWave 500i /MV/nc DC
    3 x 200 - 230 V
    3 x 400 - 575 V


    4 x AWG 4
    4 x AWG 8

    iWave 500i /nc AC/DC
    3 x 400 V
    3 x 460 V


    4 x AWG 8
    4 x AWG 8

    iWave 500i /MV/nc AC/DC
    3 x 200 - 230 V
    3 x 400 - 575 V


    4 x AWG 4
    4 x AWG 8

    1. Before installation and initial operation
    2. Connecting the Mains Cable

    Connecting the mains cable for nc welding machines

    1
    2
    3
    4
    GND - L1 - L2 - L3; 4x TX20, 1.5 Nm / 1.11 lb-ft
    5
    6
    1. Before installation and initial operation
    2. Connecting the Mains Cable

    Connecting the mains cable for MV welding machines

    1
    2
    3

    Cut the strain-relief device to length according to the outer diameter of the mains cable

    4

    IMPORTANT! When inserting the mains cable, ensure that the cable sheath protrudes approx. 5 - 10 mm beyond the strain-relief device into the device.

    5
    *
    Only loosen the 4 TX20 screws, do not remove them
    6

    Push the mains cable toward the open side in order to access the strain-relief device clamping screw.

    7
    8
    9
    10
    1. Before installation and initial operation

    Locking and unlocking the welding machine using the NFC key

    General

    NFC key = NFC card or NFC key fob

    The welding machine can be locked by means of an NFC key, e.g., to prevent unauthorized access or the modification of welding parameters.

    Locking and unlocking is a contactless operation on the welding machine control panel.

    To lock and unlock the welding machine, the welding machine must be turned on.

    1. Before installation and initial operation
    2. Locking and unlocking the welding machine using the NFC key

    General

    NFC key = NFC card or NFC key fob

    The welding machine can be locked by means of an NFC key, e.g., to prevent unauthorized access or the modification of welding parameters.

    Locking and unlocking is a contactless operation on the welding machine control panel.

    To lock and unlock the welding machine, the welding machine must be turned on.

    1. Before installation and initial operation
    2. Locking and unlocking the welding machine using the NFC key

    Locking and unlocking the welding machine using the NFC key

    Locking the welding machine

    1Hold the NFC key over the reading zone for NFC keys

    The key symbol appears briefly on the display.

    The key symbol is then displayed in the status bar.

    The welding machine is now locked.
    Only the welding parameters can be viewed and set using the dial.

    If the operator attempts to access a locked function, a corresponding message is displayed.

    Unlocking the welding machine

    1Hold the NFC key over the reading zone for NFC keys

    The crossed-out key symbol appears briefly on the display.

    The key symbol is no longer displayed in the status bar.
    All welding machine functions are available again without restriction.

    NOTE!

    Further information on locking the welding machine can be found in under "Defaults - Administration" starting on page (→).

    TIG

    System components

    System components

    (1)
    Cooling unit
    (2a)
    IWave DC welding machine
    (2b)
    iWave AC/DC welding machine
    (3)
    Return lead cable
    (4)
    Trolley and gas cylinder holder
    (5)
    Swivel pin holder
    (6)
    Cold wire feeder
    (7)
    Welding torch
    (8)
    Remote controls
    (9)
    Foot-operated remote controls

    Other system components (not shown):

    • Cold-wire feed
    • MIG/MAG wirefeeder
    • MIG/MAG welding torch
    • Twin-head wirefeeder holder
    • Interconnecting hosepacks
    • Extension hosepacks
    • Robot interface
    1. TIG

    System components

    System components

    (1)
    Cooling unit
    (2a)
    IWave DC welding machine
    (2b)
    iWave AC/DC welding machine
    (3)
    Return lead cable
    (4)
    Trolley and gas cylinder holder
    (5)
    Swivel pin holder
    (6)
    Cold wire feeder
    (7)
    Welding torch
    (8)
    Remote controls
    (9)
    Foot-operated remote controls

    Other system components (not shown):

    • Cold-wire feed
    • MIG/MAG wirefeeder
    • MIG/MAG welding torch
    • Twin-head wirefeeder holder
    • Interconnecting hosepacks
    • Extension hosepacks
    • Robot interface
    1. TIG
    2. System components

    System components

    (1)
    Cooling unit
    (2a)
    IWave DC welding machine
    (2b)
    iWave AC/DC welding machine
    (3)
    Return lead cable
    (4)
    Trolley and gas cylinder holder
    (5)
    Swivel pin holder
    (6)
    Cold wire feeder
    (7)
    Welding torch
    (8)
    Remote controls
    (9)
    Foot-operated remote controls

    Other system components (not shown):

    • Cold-wire feed
    • MIG/MAG wirefeeder
    • MIG/MAG welding torch
    • Twin-head wirefeeder holder
    • Interconnecting hosepacks
    • Extension hosepacks
    • Robot interface
    1. TIG
    2. System components

    Notes on the cooling unit

    A cooling unit is recommended for the following applications:
    • JobMaster TIG welding torch
    • Robot mode
    • Hosepacks over 5 m in length
    • TIG AC welding
    • General welding in the higher power range

    The cooling unit is supplied with power via the welding machine. If the welding machine's power switch is switched to position - I -, the cooling unit is ready for operation.
    For more information on the cooling unit, refer to the Operating Instructions for the cooling unit.

    1. TIG

    Minimum equipment for TIG welding

    Minimum equipment for TIG AC welding

    • iWave AC/DC welding machine
    • Return lead cable
    • TIG welding torch
    • Shielding gas supply with gas pressure regulator
    • Filler metal depending on application
    1. TIG
    2. Minimum equipment for TIG welding

    Minimum equipment for TIG AC welding

    • iWave AC/DC welding machine
    • Return lead cable
    • TIG welding torch
    • Shielding gas supply with gas pressure regulator
    • Filler metal depending on application
    1. TIG
    2. Minimum equipment for TIG welding

    Minimum equipment for TIG DC welding

    • Welding machine
    • Return lead cable
    • TIG welding torch
    • Shielding gas supply with gas pressure regulator
    • Filler metal depending on application
    1. TIG

    TIG welding processes

    TIG DynamicWire

    With TIG DynamicWire, the voltage between the workpiece and the welding wire is measured, allowing the wirefeeder to be actively controlled.
    The wire speed automatically adapts to the amperage, arc length, weld seam profile, or the air gap to be bridged.

    TIG DynamicWire works in Synergic operation. Current and wire speed do not have to be set separately.
    The wire speed can be optimized via the "Wire speed correction" process parameter.

    The Welding Package TIG DynamicWire provides characteristics for the most common filler metals.

    1. TIG
    2. TIG welding processes

    TIG DynamicWire

    With TIG DynamicWire, the voltage between the workpiece and the welding wire is measured, allowing the wirefeeder to be actively controlled.
    The wire speed automatically adapts to the amperage, arc length, weld seam profile, or the air gap to be bridged.

    TIG DynamicWire works in Synergic operation. Current and wire speed do not have to be set separately.
    The wire speed can be optimized via the "Wire speed correction" process parameter.

    The Welding Package TIG DynamicWire provides characteristics for the most common filler metals.

    1. TIG

    Commissioning

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from electrical current.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Before starting work, switch off all devices and components involved, and disconnect them from the grid.

    Secure all devices and components involved so they cannot be switched back on.

    After opening the device, use a suitable measuring instrument to check that electrically charged components (such as capacitors) have been discharged.

    WARNING!

    Danger of electrical current due to electrically conductive dust in the device.

    This can result in severe personal injury and damage to property.

    Only operate the device if an air filter is fitted. The air filter is a very important safety device for achieving IP 23 protection.

    1. TIG
    2. Commissioning

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from electrical current.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Before starting work, switch off all devices and components involved, and disconnect them from the grid.

    Secure all devices and components involved so they cannot be switched back on.

    After opening the device, use a suitable measuring instrument to check that electrically charged components (such as capacitors) have been discharged.

    WARNING!

    Danger of electrical current due to electrically conductive dust in the device.

    This can result in severe personal injury and damage to property.

    Only operate the device if an air filter is fitted. The air filter is a very important safety device for achieving IP 23 protection.

    1. TIG
    2. Commissioning

    General

    The start-up of the welding machines for TIG welding is described on the basis of a manual, water-cooled TIG application.

    The following diagrams provide an overview of how the individual system components are assembled.
    For detailed information about the individual steps, please refer to the corresponding Operating Instructions for the system components.

    1. TIG
    2. Commissioning

    Assembling the system components (overview)

    NOTE!

    For more detailed information about installing and connecting the system components, please refer to the corresponding Operating Instructions for the system components.

    iWave DC welding machines

    iWave AC/DC welding machines

    1. TIG
    2. Commissioning

    Connecting the gas cylinder

    WARNING!

    Danger from falling gas cylinders.

    This can result in severe personal injury and damage to property.

    Place gas cylinders on a solid, level surface so that they remain stable.

    Secure gas cylinders to prevent them from falling over: Secure the safety strap at the height of the upper part of a gas cylinder.

    Never secure the safety strap to the neck of the cylinder.

    Observe the safety rules of the gas cylinder manufacturer.

    1Place the gas cylinder on the base of the trolley
    2Attach the cylinder strap to the upper part of the gas cylinder (but not to the neck of the cylinder) to prevent the cylinder from falling over
    3Remove the protective cap from the gas cylinder
    4Briefly open the gas cylinder valve to remove any dirt
    5Inspect the seal on the gas pressure regulator
    6Screw the pressure regulator onto the gas cylinder and tighten it

    When using a TIG welding torch with integrated gas connection:

    7Use a gas hose to connect the gas pressure regulator and shielding gas connection to the rear of the welding machine
    8Tighten the union nut of the gas hose

    When using a TIG welding torch without integrated gas connection:

    6Connect the gas hose of the TIG welding torch to the gas pressure regulator

    NOTE!

    The gas connection when using a MultiControl (MC) cooling unit is described in the Operating Instructions for the cooling unit.

    1. TIG
    2. Commissioning

    Connecting the welding torch to the welding machine and cooling unit

    NOTE!

    Do not use pure tungsten electrodes for iWave DC welding machines (color code: green).

    NOTE!

    Before every start-up:

    Check the O-ring at the welding torch connection,

    Check the coolant level

    1Fit parts to the welding torch according to the Operating Instructions for the welding torch
    2

    IMPORTANT! Check the coolant flow at regular intervals during welding.

    1. TIG
    2. Commissioning

    Establishing a ground earth connection to the workpiece

    NOTE!

    When establishing a ground earth connection, observe the following points:

    Use a separate return lead cable for each welding machine

    Keep the torch hosepack and return lead cable as close together as possible for as long as possible

    Physically separate the welding circuits of individual welding machines

    Do not route several return lead cables in parallel;
    if parallel routing cannot be avoided, keep a minimum distance of 30 cm between the welding circuits

    Keep the return lead cables as short as possible and use cables with a large cross-section

    Do not cross over return lead cables

    Avoid ferromagnetic materials between the return lead cables and the interconnecting hosepack

    Do not reel up long return lead cables—coil effect!
    Route long return lead cables in loops

    Do not route return lead cables in iron pipes, metal cable trays, or along steel beams, avoid cable ducts;
    (routing positive cables and return lead cables together in an iron pipe does not cause any problems)

    If several return lead cables are being used, separate the grounding points on the component as far as possible and do not allow crossed current paths between the individual arcs.

    Use compensated interconnecting hosepacks (interconnecting hosepacks with integrated return lead cable)

    1Set the power switch to - O -
    2
    1. TIG
    2. Commissioning

    Other activities

    For a TIG cold wire feeder

    1Set up the components required for TIG welding on the trolley (e.g., swivel pin holder, etc.)
    2Connect the control line to the wirefeeder
    3Connect the control line to the TMC socket on the front of the welding machine
    4Only if the OPT/i CWF TMC welding torch option is present on the wirefeeder:
    Connect the wirefeeder to the welding machine using the interconnecting hosepack
    5Set up cold-wire feed on TIG welding torch
    6Connect wirefeeding hose to wirefeeder
    7Insert suitable feed rollers for the TIG application into the wirefeeder
    8Set up suitable wear parts for the TIG application on the welding torch
    9Insert wire spool or basket-type spool and its adapter into the wirefeeder

    NOTE!

    For details on mounting or connecting the TIG components, refer to the Installation Instructions and Operating Instructions of the respective system components.

    10Connect the welding machine to the grid and switch on
    11Feed in the welding wire
    12Setting the contact pressure
    13Adjust the brake
    14Perform R/L adjustment
    For details, see from page (→).
    1. TIG

    TIG Operating Modes

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger due to incorrect operation.

    This can result in severe personal injury and damage to property.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have fully read and understood the Operating Instructions.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have fully read and understood all of the Operating Instructions of the system components, especially the safety rules.

    Follow the guidelines referring to setting, setting range, and units of measurement for the available parameters in the "Setup Menu" section.

    1. TIG
    2. TIG Operating Modes

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger due to incorrect operation.

    This can result in severe personal injury and damage to property.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have fully read and understood the Operating Instructions.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have fully read and understood all of the Operating Instructions of the system components, especially the safety rules.

    Follow the guidelines referring to setting, setting range, and units of measurement for the available parameters in the "Setup Menu" section.

    1. TIG
    2. TIG Operating Modes

    Symbols and explanations

    (1) Pull back and hold the torch trigger (2) Release the torch trigger (3) Briefly pull back the torch trigger (< 0.5 s)
    (4) Push the torch trigger forward and hold (5) Release the torch trigger
    GPr
    Gas pre-flow
    SPt
    Spot welding time
    IS
    Starting current:
    the temperature is raised gently at low welding current, so that the filler metal can be positioned correctly
    IE
    Final current:
    to avoid local overheating of the parent material caused by heat accumulation at the end of welding. This prevents possible sagging of the weld seam.
    tUP
    UpSlope:
    steady rise of the starting current to the main current (welding current) I1
    tDOWN
    DownSlope:
    steady lowering of the welding current until it reaches the final current
    I1
    Main current (welding current):
    uniform thermal input into the parent material, whose temperature is raised by the advancing heat
    I2
    Lowering current:
    intermediate lowering of the welding current to avoid local overheating of the parent material
    GPO
    Gas post-flow
    1. TIG
    2. TIG Operating Modes

    2-step mode

    • Welding: Pull back the torch trigger and hold it in this position
    • End of welding: Release the torch trigger
    2-step mode
    1. TIG
    2. TIG Operating Modes

    4-step mode

    • Start of welding with starting current IS: Pull back the torch trigger and hold it in this position
    • Welding with main current I1: Release the torch trigger
    • Lowering to final current IE: Pull back the torch trigger and hold it in this position
    • End of welding: Release the torch trigger
    4-step mode

    *) Intermediate lowering

    With intermediate lowering, the welding current is lowered to the set lowering current I2  during the main current phase.

    • To activate intermediate lowering, push the torch trigger forward and hold it in this position
    • Release the torch trigger to resume the main current
    1. TIG
    2. TIG Operating Modes

    Special 4-step mode:
    Version 1

    Intermediate lowering to the set lowering current I2 is effected by briefly pulling back the torch trigger. Briefly pull back the torch trigger again to return to the main current I1.

    Special 4-step mode: Version 1

    Version 1 of special 4-step mode is activated by the following parameter setting:

    Process parameters / General / 2-step settings
    • Starting current time = off
    • Final current time = off
    Process parameters / General / 4-step settings
    • Lowering current slope 1 = off
    • Lowering current slope 2 = off
    Process parameters / Ignition & operating mode / Operating mode settings
    • I2 via torch trigger = on
    • Lowering current button function = I2
    1. TIG
    2. TIG Operating Modes

    Special 4-step mode:
    Version 2

    In version 2, intermediate lowering is also carried out using the set lowering current slope 1/2 values:
    • Push the torch trigger forward and hold it in this position: the welding current steadily falls using the set lowering current slope 1 to the set lowering current value I2. The lowering current I2 continues until the torch trigger is released.
    • After releasing the torch trigger: the welding current rises to the main current I1 using the set lowering current slope 2.
    Special 4-step mode: Version 2

    Version 2 of special 4-step mode is activated by the following parameter setting:

    Process parameters / General / 2-step settings
    • Starting current time = off
    • Final current time = off
    Process parameters / General / 4-step settings
    • Lowering current slope 1 = on
    • Lowering current slope 2 = on
    Process parameters / Ignition & operating mode / Operating mode settings
    • I2 via torch trigger = off
    • Lowering current button function = I2
    1. TIG
    2. TIG Operating Modes

    Special 4-step mode:
    Version 3

    Intermediate lowering of the welding current in version 3 is triggered by pushing the torch trigger forward and holding it in this position. Following the release of the torch trigger, the main current I1 is once again available.

    Pull back the torch trigger to immediately end welding without a downslope and final current.

    Special 4-step mode: Version 3

    Version 3 of special 4-step mode is activated using the following parameter setting:

    Process parameters / General / 2-step settings
    • Starting current time = off
    • Final current time = 0.01 s
    Process parameters / General / 4-step settings
    • Lowering current slope 1 = off
    • Lowering current slope 2 = off
    Process parameters / Ignition & operating mode / Operating mode settings
    • I2 via torch trigger = off
    • Lowering current button function = I2
    1. TIG
    2. TIG Operating Modes

    Special 4-step mode:
    Version 4

    • Start of welding and welding: Briefly pull back the torch trigger and release - the welding current rises from the starting current IS to the main current I1 using the set UpSlope.
    • Push forward the torch trigger and hold it in this position for intermediate lowering
    • Following the release of the torch trigger, the main current I1 is once again available
    • End of welding: Quickly pull back the torch trigger and release
    Special 4-step mode: Version 4

    Version 4 of special 4-step mode is activated using the following parameter setting:

    Process parameters / General / 2-step settings
    • Starting current time = on
    • Final current time = on
    Process parameters / General / 4-step settings
    • Lowering current slope 1 = off
    • Lowering current slope 2 = off
    Process parameters / Ignition & operating mode / Operating mode settings
    • I2 via torch trigger = off
    • Lowering current button function = I2
    1. TIG
    2. TIG Operating Modes

    Special 4-step mode:
    Version 5

    Version 5 allows the welding current to be increased and decreased without an Up/Down torch.
    • The longer the torch trigger is pressed forward during welding, the further the welding current increases (up to the maximum).
    • After releasing the torch trigger, the welding current remains constant.
    • The longer the torch trigger is pressed forward again, the further the welding current is reduced.
    Special 4-step mode: Version 5

    Version 5 of special 4-step mode is activated using the following parameter setting:

    Process parameters / General / 2-step settings
    • Starting current time = off
    • Final current time = off
    Process parameters / General / 4-step settings
    • Lowering current slope 1 = off
    • Lowering current slope 2 = off
    Process parameters / Ignition & operating mode / Operating mode settings
    • I2 via torch trigger = off or on
    • Lowering current button function = I1
    1. TIG
    2. TIG Operating Modes

    Special 4-step mode:
    Version 6

    • Start of welding with starting currentIS and UpSlope: Pull back the torch trigger and hold it in this position
    • Intermediate lowering to I2 and change from I2 back to main current I1: briefly press (< 0.5 s) and release torch trigger
    • End the welding process: long press (> 0.5 s) and release the torch trigger.

    The process is automatically terminated after the DownSlope phase and the final current phase.

    If the torch trigger is pressed briefly (< 0.5 s) and released during the DownSlope or final current phase, an UpSlope to the main current is initiated and the welding process continues.

    Special 4-step mode: Version 6

    Version 6 of special 4-step mode is activated by the following parameter setting:

    Process parameters / General / 2-step settings
    • Starting current time = off
    • Final current time = on
    Process parameters / General / 4-step settings
    • Lowering current slope 1 = off
    • Lowering current slope 2 = off
    Process parameters / Ignition & operating mode / Operating mode settings
    • I2 via torch trigger = on
    • Lowering current button function = I2
    1. TIG
    2. TIG Operating Modes

    Spot welding

    • Welding: Briefly pull back the torch trigger
      The duration of welding corresponds to the value that was entered for the "Spot welding time" setup parameter.
    • Premature ending of the welding process: Pull the torch trigger back again
    1. TIG

    TIG welding

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation and work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    All the work and functions described in this document must only be carried out by technically trained and qualified personnel.

    Read and understand this document in full.

    Read and understand all safety rules and user documentation for this equipment and all system components.

    WARNING!

    Danger from electrical current.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Before starting work, switch off all the devices and components involved and disconnect them from the grid.

    Secure all devices and components involved so they cannot be switched back on.

    After opening the device, use a suitable measuring instrument to check that electrically charged components (such as capacitors) have been discharged.

    1. TIG
    2. TIG welding

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation and work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    All the work and functions described in this document must only be carried out by technically trained and qualified personnel.

    Read and understand this document in full.

    Read and understand all safety rules and user documentation for this equipment and all system components.

    WARNING!

    Danger from electrical current.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Before starting work, switch off all the devices and components involved and disconnect them from the grid.

    Secure all devices and components involved so they cannot be switched back on.

    After opening the device, use a suitable measuring instrument to check that electrically charged components (such as capacitors) have been discharged.

    1. TIG
    2. TIG welding

    TIG welding

    CAUTION!

    Danger of injury and damage from electric shock.

    When the power switch is switched to position - I -, the tungsten electrode of the welding torch is live.

    Ensure that the tungsten electrode is not touching anyone or any electrically conductive or grounded parts (housing, etc.).

    1Set the power switch to - I -
    2Select "Welding process"
    3Select "Process"

    Alternatively, the welding process can also be selected via the status bar (compare with the procedure described from page (→)).

    An overview of available welding processes is displayed.

    4Select "TIG" or "TIG cold wire" or "DynamicWire"
    5Select "Mode"

    An overview of operating modes is displayed.

    6Select the desired operating mode
    7Only for cold wire and DynamicWire applications:
    Select and set the "Filler metal"
    8Select "TIG welding"

    Alternatively, the operating mode can also be selected via the status bar (compare with the procedure described from page (→)).

    The TIG welding parameters are displayed.

    9Turn the dial (or touch the welding parameters symbol in the indicator bar): select the welding parameter
    10Press the dial

    The value of the parameter is highlighted in blue and can now be changed.

    11Turn the dial: change the value of the parameter
    12If necessary, set the process parameters for user- or application-specific settings on the welding system
    13Open the gas cylinder valve
    14Press the gas-test button

    The gas pre-flow test lasts for 30 seconds at the most. Press again to end the process prematurely.
    The "Gas purging" dialog box appears on the display, indicating the remaining gas purging duration.
    If there is a gas regulator or gas sensor in the welding system, the actual gas value is also displayed.

    15Turn the adjusting screw on the bottom of the gas pressure regulator until the manometer displays the desired quantity of gas
    16Commence the welding process (ignite arc)

    NOTE!

    Under certain circumstances, it may not be possible to change the set welding parameters of a system component—such as wirefeeder or remote control—on the control panel of the welding machine.

    1. TIG
    2. TIG welding

    Welding parameters for TIG welding

    AC
    Welding parameters for TIG AC welding
    DC-
    Welding parameters for TIG DC- welding

    Start current (AC / DC-)

    Start current: 2-step mode | 4-step mode

    Setting range: 0 - 200% (of the main current)
    Factory setting: 50%

    IMPORTANT! The start current is stored separately for TIG AC welding and TIG DC- welding.

    Up-Slope (AC / DC-)

    Up-Slope: 2-step mode and spot welding | 4-step mode

    Setting range: off; 0.1 - 30.0 s
    Factory setting: 0.5 s

    IMPORTANT! The stored UpSlope value applies to the 2-step and 4-step modes.

    Main Current I1 (AC / DC-)

    Main current: 2-step mode and spot welding | 4-step mode

    Setting range:
    iWave 300i DC, iWave 300i AC/DC: 3 - 300 A
    iWave 400i DC, iWave 400i AC/DC: 3 - 400 A
    iWave 500i DC, iWave 500i AC/DC: 3 - 500 A
    Factory setting: -

    IMPORTANT! For welding torches with Up/Down function, the full setting range can be selected while the device is on standby.

    Drop current I2 (AC / DC-)
    only in 4-step mode

    Drop current I2 < Main current I1 | Drop current I2 > Main current I1

    Setting range: 0 - 250% (of the main current I1)
    Factory setting: 50%

    I2 < 100%
    Brief, adapted reduction of the welding current
    (e.g., when changing the welding wire during the welding process)

    I2 > 100%
    Brief, adapted increase in the welding current
    (e.g., for welding over tacking points with a higher power level)

    The values for Slope1 and Slope2 can be set in the process parameters.

    Down-Slope (AC / DC-)

    Down-Slope: 2-step mode and spot welding | 4-step mode

    Setting range: off; 0.1 - 30.0 s
    Factory setting: 1.0 s

    IMPORTANT! The stored Down-Slope value applies to the 2-step and 4-step modes.

    Final current (AC / DC-)

    Final current: 2-step mode and spot welding | 4-step mode

    Setting range: 0 - 100% (of the main current)
    Factory setting: 30%

    AC Balance (AC)
    only with iWave AC/DC

    Balance = 15%
    Balance = 35%
    Balance = 50%

    Setting range: 15 - 50%
    Factory setting: 35%

    15: Highest melting capacity, lowest cleaning effect

    50: Highest cleaning effect, lowest melting capacity

    Effect of balance on current flow:

    Electrode diameter (AC / DC-)

    Setting range: off; 1.0 – 6.4 mm
    Factory setting: 2.4 mm

    Cap shaping (AC)
    only with iWave AC/DC

    Setting range: off / on
    Factory setting: off

    off
    Automatic cap-shaping function is deactivated

    on
    The optimum cap for the entered diameter of the tungsten electrode is shaped during the start of welding.
    The automatic cap-shaping function is then reset and deactivated.

    (1) ... before ignition
    (2) ... after ignition

    Cap shaping must be activated separately for each tungsten electrode.

    NOTE!

    The automatic cap-shaping function is not required if a sufficiently large cap is formed on the tungsten electrode.

    Polarity (AC)
    only with iWave AC/DC

    WARNING!

    Danger due to applied welding potential with Multiprocess-PRO welding machines and with existing dual-head wirefeeder WF 25i Dual!

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Disconnect the dual-head wirefeeder from the welding system before setting the polarity to AC!

    Polarity

    Setting range: DC- / AC
    Factory setting: DC-

    NOTE!

    To add more parameters to the welding parameters, go to Defaults / View / Parameter view setup.

    More information can be found from page (→) onwards.

    1. TIG

    Igniting the arc

    General

    In order to ensure an optimal ignition sequence during TIG AC welding, the iWave AC/DC welding machines take into account:
    • The diameter of the tungsten electrode
    • The current temperature of the tungsten electrode, taking into account the previous welding time and break
    1. TIG
    2. Igniting the arc

    General

    In order to ensure an optimal ignition sequence during TIG AC welding, the iWave AC/DC welding machines take into account:
    • The diameter of the tungsten electrode
    • The current temperature of the tungsten electrode, taking into account the previous welding time and break
    1. TIG
    2. Igniting the arc

    Igniting the arc using high frequency
    (HF ignition)

    CAUTION!

    Risk of injury due to an electric shock

    Although Fronius devices comply with all the relevant standards, high-frequency ignition can transmit a harmless but noticeable electric shock under certain circumstances.

    Use prescribed protective clothing, especially gloves!

    Only use suitable, completely intact and undamaged TIG hosepacks!

    Do not work in damp or wet environments!

    Take special care when working on scaffolding, work platforms, in tight, difficult to access or exposed places, or when welding out-of-position!

    HF ignition is activated when the "HF ignition" setup parameter is set to "on" under process parameters/ignition parameters.
    The HF ignition indicator lights up on the status bar.

    Unlike contact ignition, there is no risk of contaminating the tungsten electrode and workpiece during HF ignition.

    Procedure for HF ignition:

    1Position the gas nozzle at the ignition point so that there is a gap of approximately 2 to 3 mm (5/64 - 1/8 in.) between the tungsten electrode and the workpiece. A gap exists.
    2Increase the tilt angle of the welding torch and press the torch trigger according to the selected operating mode

    The arc ignites without coming into contact with the workpiece.

    3Tilt the welding torch to the normal position
    4Carry out welding
    1. TIG
    2. Igniting the arc

    Contact ignition

    When the "HF ignition" setup parameter is set to "off", HF ignition is deactivated. The arc ignites when the workpiece makes contact with the tungsten electrode.

    Procedure for igniting the arc using contact ignition:

    1Position the gas nozzle at the ignition point so that there is a gap of approximately 2 to 3 mm (5/64 to 1/8 in.) between the tungsten electrode and the workpiece. A gap exists
    2Press the torch trigger

    Shielding gas flows

    3Gradually tilt the welding torch up until the tungsten electrode touches the workpiece
    4Raise the welding torch and rotate it into its normal position

    The arc ignites.

    5Carry out welding
    1. TIG
    2. Igniting the arc

    Igniting the arc using high-frequency contact
    (Touch-HF)

    CAUTION!

    Risk of injury due to an electric shock

    Although Fronius devices comply with all relevant standards, the high-frequency ignition can transmit a harmless but noticeable electric shock under certain circumstances.

    Use prescribed protective clothing, especially gloves!

    Only use suitable, completely intact and undamaged TIG hosepacks!

    Do not work in damp or wet environments!

    Take special care when working on scaffolds, work platforms, in forced positions, in tight, difficult to access or exposed places!

    The welding process is initiated by briefly touching the workpiece with the tungsten electrode. The high-frequency ignition is performed after the set HF ignition delay time has elapsed.

    1. TIG
    2. Igniting the arc

    Electrode overload

    If the tungsten electrode is overloaded, this can result in material detachment on the electrode, which can cause contamination to enter the weld pool.

    If the tungsten electrode is overloaded, the "Electrode overloaded" indicator lights up on the status bar of the control panel.
    The "Electrode overloaded" indicator depends on the set electrode diameter and the set welding current.

    1. TIG
    2. Igniting the arc

    End of welding

    1Depending on the set operating mode, end welding by releasing the torch trigger
    2Wait for the set gas post-flow and hold the welding torch in position over the end of the weld seam.
    1. TIG

    TIG special functions

    Ignition timeout function

    The welding machine has an ignition timeout function.

    If the torch trigger is pressed, gas pre-flow begins immediately and the ignition procedure is then initiated. If no arc forms during one of the time periods specified under the ignition parameters, the welding machine automatically switches off.

    The setting of the "Ignition timeout" parameter is described in the Process parameters/ignition and operating mode settings section starting on page (→).

    1. TIG
    2. TIG special functions

    Ignition timeout function

    The welding machine has an ignition timeout function.

    If the torch trigger is pressed, gas pre-flow begins immediately and the ignition procedure is then initiated. If no arc forms during one of the time periods specified under the ignition parameters, the welding machine automatically switches off.

    The setting of the "Ignition timeout" parameter is described in the Process parameters/ignition and operating mode settings section starting on page (→).

    1. TIG
    2. TIG special functions

    TIG pulsing

    The welding current set at the start of welding may not always be ideal for the entire welding process:

    • If the amperage is too low, the parent material will not be sufficiently melted,
    • If overheating occurs, there is a danger that the liquid weld pool may drip.

    The TIG pulsing function is able to help with this (TIG welding with a pulsing welding current):
    A low base current (2) rises steeply to a significantly higher pulse current and falls again in line with the set duty cycle (5) to the base current (2).
    During TIG pulsing, small sections of the welding area are quickly melted and then allowed to quickly solidify again.
    During manual applications, the welding wire is applied in the maximum current phase during TIG pulsing (only possible in the low-frequency range from 0.25 - 5 Hz). Higher pulse frequencies are mostly used in automated applications and mainly serve to stabilize the arc.

    TIG pulsing is used to weld steel pipes when welding out-of-position or to weld thin sheet metal.

    TIG pulsing in operation with TIG DC welding selected:

    TIG pulsing - welding current curve

    Key:
    (1) Main current, (2) Base current, (3) Starting current, (4) UpSlope, (5) Pulse frequency *)
    (6) Duty cycle, (7) DownSlope, (8) Final current

    *) (1/F-P = Time between two pulses)

    1. TIG
    2. TIG special functions

    Tacking function

    The tacking function is used for the TIG DC welding process.

    Whenever a period of time is set for the "Tacking" (4) parameter under process parameters/TIG DC settings, the tacking function is assigned to the 2-step and 4-step modes. The sequence of operating modes remains unchanged.
    The Tacking (TAC) indicator lights up on the status bar:

    During this time, a pulsed welding current is available, which optimizes the merging of the weld pool when tacking two components.

    How the tacking function works during TIG DC welding:

    Tacking function - welding current curve

    Key:
    (1) Main current, (2) Starting current, (3) UpSlope, (4) Duration of pulsed welding current for tacking process, (5) DownSlope, (6) Final current

    NOTE!

    When using a pulsed welding current:

    The welding machine automatically controls the pulse parameters according to the set main current (1).
    No pulse parameters need to be set.

    The pulsed welding current starts
    • After the starting-current phase (2) has finished 
    • With the UpSlope phase (3)

    Depending on the set tacking duration, the pulsed welding current can be stopped up to and including the final current phase (6) ("Tacking" (4) TIG DC parameter to "on").

    After the tacking time has passed, further welding is carried out at a constant welding current. Set pulse parameters are available if applicable.

    1. TIG
    2. TIG special functions

    CycleTIG

    The CycleTIG interval welding process is available for TIG DC welding.
    The welding result is influenced and controlled by different parameter combinations.

    The main advantages of CycleTIG are easy control of the weld pool, targeted heat input and fewer temper colors.

    CycleTIG variants

    CycleTIG + low base current

    • For out-of-position welding, edge build-up and orbital welding
    • Well suited for thick/light-gage sheet connections
    • Excellent weld characteristics
    • HF ignition only at start of welding
    • Long electrode service life
    • Good control of the weld pool
    • Targeted heat input

    CycleTIG + RPI = on + base current = off

    • For repair work (e.g., edge build-up)
    • Targeted heat input
    • Biggest advantage in combination with HF ignition setting = touch HF
    • HF ignition at every cycle (!)
    • Very short electrode service life (!)

    Recommendation: iWave AC/DC with reversed polarity ignition setting = auto

    CycleTIG + Tacking

    • For tacking light gage sheets, orbital applications and for thick/light gage sheet joints
    • HF ignition only at start of welding
    • Long electrode service life
    • Good control of the weld pool
    • Targeted heat input
    • Excellent seam appearance
    • Tacking function generates automatic pulse setting

    CycleTIG + Pulse
    CycleTIG can be used individually with all pulse settings. This allows pulsing in both the high current and low current phases.

    • For tacking light gage sheets and for cladding applications
    • For thick/light gage sheet joints
    • HF ignition only at start of welding
    • Long electrode service life
    • Good control of the weld pool
    • Targeted heat input
    • Excellent seam appearance
    • Individual pulse settings possible
    • More welding parameters to set
    1. TIG

    TIG process parameters

    TIG process parameters

    TIG process parameters:
    TIG pulse, AC, General, Ignition & trigger mode, CycleTIG, Wirefeeder setup, Gas, R/L-check / alignment

    Process parameters for Components and Monitoring see page (→).

    1. TIG
    2. TIG process parameters

    TIG process parameters

    TIG process parameters:
    TIG pulse, AC, General, Ignition & trigger mode, CycleTIG, Wirefeeder setup, Gas, R/L-check / alignment

    Process parameters for Components and Monitoring see page (→).

    1. TIG
    2. TIG process parameters

    Process parameters for TIG pulse

    Tacking
    Tacking function - duration of the pulsed welding current at the start of the tacking process

    off / 0.1 - 9.9 s / on
    Factory setting: off

    off
    Tacking function is switched off

    0.1 - 9.9 s
    The selected time begins with the UpSlope phase. After the selected time has passed, further welding is carried out at a constant welding current. The set pulse parameters are available if applicable.

    on
    The pulsed welding current remains present until the end of the tacking process

    The Tacking (TAC) indicator lights up on the display if a value has been set.

    Pulse frequency

    off / 0.20 - 2000 Hz (10,000 Hz with OPT/I-Puls Pro option)
    Factory setting: off

    IMPORTANT! If the pulse frequency is set to "off", the base current and duty cycle parameters cannot be selected.

    The set pulse frequency is also applied for the lowering current.

    The Pulsing indicator lights up in the status bar if a value for the pulse frequency has been entered.

    Base current *

    0 - 100% (of the main current I1)I
    Factory setting: 50%

    Duty cycle *
    Relationship between pulse duration and base current duration at the set pulse frequency

    10 - 90%
    Factory setting: 50%

    Pulse waveform *
    For optimizing the arc pressure

    Hard rectangle/Soft rectangle/Sine
    Factory setting: Hard rectangle

    Hard rectangle:
    Purely rectangular curve;
    Slightly louder arc noise, rapid current changes
    Used, for example, in orbital welding

    Soft rectangle:
    Rectangular curve with reduced edge steepness, for reduced noise in comparison with the purely rectangular curve;
    universal use

    Sine:
    Sinusoidal shape (default setting for low-noise and stable arc);
    Used, for example, for corner seams and cladding applications

    Optimizing the arc pressure results in:

    • A better flow out of the weld pool (improved welding of butt welds or corner seams)
    • A slow rise or fall in current (for fillet welds, high-alloy steels or cladding applications in particular, the filler material or weld pool is not pushed away)
    • A reduction in the noise level during welding thanks to rounded waveforms

    Base current waveform *
    For optimizing arc pressure

    Hard rectangle/Soft rectangle/Sine
    Factory setting: Hard rectangle

    Hard rectangle:
    Purely rectangular curve;
    Slightly louder arc noise, rapid current changes
    Used, for example, in orbital welding

    Soft rectangle:
    Rectangular curve with reduced edge steepness, for reduced noise in comparison with the purely rectangular curve;
    universal use

    Sine:
    Sinusoidal shape (default setting for low-noise and stable arc);
    Used, for example, for corner seams and cladding applications

     

    *
    The parameters are available if the OPT/I-Puls Pro option is present on the welding machine.
    1. TIG
    2. TIG process parameters

    Process parameters for TIG AC

    AC frequency

    Syn/40 - 250 Hz
    Factory setting: 60 Hz

    Syn
    Setting for synchronous welding (double-side, simultaneous welding with 2 welding machines)
    For synchronous welding, the AC frequency must be set to "Syn" for both welding machines.
    Synchronous welding is used for thick materials, to achieve a high deposition rate and to minimize inclusions during welding.

    IMPORTANT! Due to the phasing of the input voltage, in some cases the synchronization of the two welding machines cannot be carried out correctly.
    In this case, disconnect the mains plug of the welding machines, turn 180°, and reconnect to the grid.

    Low frequency
    Soft, wide arc with shallow heat input

    High frequency
    Focused arc with deep heat input

    Effect of AC frequency on current flow:

    AC current offset

    -70 to +70%
    Factory setting: 0%

    +70%
    Wide arc with shallow heat input

    -70%
    Narrow arc, deep heat input, higher welding speed

    Effect of AC current offset on current flow:

    * Factory setting: 0 (corresponds to a 10% shift to negative)

    Positive half-wave waveform

    Hard rectangle/Soft rectangle/Triangle/Sine
    Factory setting: Sine

    Hard rectangle
    Purely rectangular curve (stable but loud arc)

    Soft rectangle:
    Rectangular curve with reduced edge steepness, for reduced noise in comparison with the purely rectangular curve

    Triangle
    Triangular curve

    Sine
    Sinusoidal curve (default setting for low-noise arc)

    Negative half-wave waveform

    Hard rectangle/Soft rectangle/Triangle/Sine
    Factory setting: Soft rectangle

    Hard rectangle
    Purely rectangular curve (stable but loud arc)

    Soft rectangle:
    Rectangular curve with reduced edge steepness, for reduced noise in comparison with the purely rectangular curve

    Triangle
    Triangular curve

    Sine
    Sinusoidal curve (default setting for low-noise and stable arc)

    Phase synchronization
    Synchronizes two AC welding machines (simultaneously on both sides)

    0 - 5
    Factory setting: 0

    1. TIG
    2. TIG process parameters

    General TIG process parameters


    Welding start / welding end settings

    Starting current time
    The starting current time indicates the duration of the starting-current phase .

    The setting of the Starting current time parameter also influences versions 1 - 6 of special 4-step mode (see page (→) onwards).

    off / 0.01 - 30.0 s
    Factory setting: off

    IMPORTANT! The starting current time is only valid for 2-step mode and spot welding. In 4-step mode, the duration of the starting-current phase is determined  by the torch trigger.

    Final current time
    The final current time indicates the duration of the final current phase.

    The setting of the Final current time parameter also influences versions 1 - 6 of special 4-step mode (see page (→) onwards).

    off / 0.01 - 30 s
    Factory setting: off

    IMPORTANT! The final current time is only valid for 2-step mode and spot welding. In 4-step mode, the duration of the final current phase is determined by the torch trigger (section "TIG operating modes").


    4-mode settings

    Lowering current Slope 1

    The setting of the Lowering current slope 1 parameter also influences versions 1 - 6 of special 4-step mode (see page (→) onwards).

    off / 0.01 - 30 s
    Factory setting: off

    If a time value has been entered for the Lowering current Slope 1 parameter, the brief current reduction or current increase is not abrupt, but slow and adapted.
    This reduces negative influences on the weld and part, especially with aluminum applications.

    Lowering current Slope 2

    The setting of the Lowering current slope 2 parameter also influences versions 1 - 6 of special 4-step mode (see page (→) onwards).

    off / 0.01 - 30 s
    Factory setting: off

    If a time value has been entered for the Lowering current Slope 2 parameter, the adaptation from the lowering current to the welding current is not abrupt, but slow and adapted.

    In the case of a current increase, for example, the weld pool is heated slowly and not abruptly. This facilitates outgassing of the weld pool and reduces pores during aluminum welding.


    Spot welding settings

    Spot welding time
    (only if the mode is set to spot welding)

    0.02 - 120 s
    Factory setting: 5.0 s

    1. TIG
    2. TIG process parameters

    Process parameters for ignition and operating mode

    Ignition parameters

    HF ignition

    on/off/Touch-HF/external
    Factory setting: on

    on
    High frequency ignition at the start of welding is activated

    off
    No high frequency ignition at the start of welding.
    In this case, welding is started by means of contact ignition.

    Touch-HF
    The welding process is initiated by briefly touching the workpiece with the tungsten electrode. The high frequency ignition is performed after the set HF ignition delay time has elapsed.

    External
    Start with an external ignition device, e.g., plasma welding

    The HF ignition indicator lights up in the status bar if HF ignition has been set to on.

    CAUTION!

    Risk of injury due to an electric shock

    Although Fronius devices comply with all the relevant standards, high frequency ignition can transmit a harmless but noticeable electric shock under certain circumstances.

    Use prescribed protective clothing, especially gloves!

    Only use suitable, completely intact, and undamaged TIG hosepacks!

    Do not work in damp or wet environments!

    Take special care when working on scaffolding, work platforms, in tight, difficult to access or exposed places, or when welding out-of-position!

    HF ignition delay time
    Time after touching the workpiece with the tungsten electrode after which high frequency ignition takes place.

    0.1 - 5.0 s
    Factory setting: 1.0 s

    Reversed polarity ignition
    (only with iWave AC/DC welding machines)

    To ensure an optimum ignition sequence during TIG DC welding, the polarity is reversed briefly at the start of the welding process. Electrons emerge from the workpiece and hit the tungsten electrode. This results in rapid heating of the tungsten electrode—an essential prerequisite for optimum ignition properties.

    off/on/auto
    Factory setting: off

     Reversed polarity ignition is recommended for welding light-gauge sheets.


    Arc monitoring

    Ignition timeout
    Period of time until the safety cut-out following failed ignition.

    0.1 - 9.9 s
    Factory setting: 5 s

    IMPORTANT! Ignition timeout is a safety function and cannot be deactivated.
    The ignition timeout function is described in the "TIG welding" section.

    Arc break filter time
    Period of time until the safety cut-out following an arc break

    If no current flows during the set period of time following an arc break, the welding machine automatically switches off.
    Press any button on the control panel or the torch trigger to restart the welding process.

    0.00 - 2.00 s
    Factory setting: 0.20 s

    Arc break watchdog
    Reaction if no current flows within the arc break time

    ignore/error
    Factory setting: ignore

    ignore
    The interruption is ignored.

    error
    An error message is displayed on the welding machine and must be acknowledged.


    Operating mode settings

    Torch trigger
    Start welding by pressing the torch trigger

    on / off
    Factory setting: on

    on
    Welding is started using the torch trigger

    on
    Welding is started by touching the workpiece with the tungsten electrode;
    especially suitable for welding torches without torch triggers, ignition sequence depends on ignition parameters

    The symbol for the deactivated torch trigger is shown in the status bar of the display, the option of selecting the operating mode is deactivated.

    I2 using torch trigger
    to activate/deactivate whether it is possible to switch over to the drop current I2 using the torch trigger

    The setting of the I2 using torch trigger parameter also influences versions 1 - 6 of special 4-step mode (see page (→) onwards).

    on / off
    Factory setting: off

    Drop current button function

    The setting of the drop current button function parameter also influences versions 1 - 6 of special 4-step mode (see page (→) onwards).

    I1 / I2
    Factory setting: I2

    Arc break voltage
    To set a voltage value at which the welding process can be ended by lifting the TIG welding torch slightly.
    The higher the break voltage value, the higher the arc can be lifted.

    The arc break voltage values for 2-step mode, 4-step mode and operation with a foot-operated remote control are all stored together.
    If the "Torch trigger" parameter is set to "off", the values are stored separately.

    off / 6.0 - 90.0 V
    Factory setting: off

    Comfort stop sensitivity
    The parameter is only available if the "Torch trigger" parameter is set to "off".

    off / 0.1 - 10.0 V
    Factory setting: off

    At the end of the welding process, an automatic shutdown of the welding current follows a significant increase of the arc length. This prevents the arc from having to be unnecessarily lengthened when lifting the TIG welding torch.

    Process:

    1Welding
    2Briefly lift the welding torch at the end of welding

    The arc lengthens significantly.
    3Lower the welding torch
    • The arc shortens significantly
    • The Comfort stop function has been activated
    4Maintain height of the welding torch
    • The welding current ramps down continuously (DownSlope).
    • The arc goes out.
    IMPORTANT! The DownSlope is fixed and cannot be adjusted.
    5 Lift the welding torch from the workpiece
    1. TIG
    2. TIG process parameters

    CycleTIG

    CycleTIG
    to activate / deactivate the CycleTIG function
    (extended interval welding process for DC welding)

    Setting range: on / off
    Factory setting: off

    (1) Interval time
    To set how long the welding current I1 is active

    Setting range: 0.02 - 2.00 s
    Factory setting: 0.5 s

    (2) Interval pause time
    To set how long the base current (4) is active

    Setting range: 0.02 - 2.00 s
    Factory setting: 0.5 s

    (3) Interval cycles
    to set how many cycles are to be repeated

    Setting range: Constant / 1 - 2000
    Factory setting: Constant

    (4) base current (DC-)
    To set the interval base current (4) to which the current is reduced during the interval pause time (2)

    Setting range: off / 3 - max. A
    Factory setting: off

    NOTE!

    For more details on CycleTIG, see page (→) onwards.

    1. TIG
    2. TIG process parameters

    Wire speed setting

    Wire speed correctionFor fine adjustment of the wire speed with TIG DynamicWire

    The correction value indicates how quickly the welding wire re-enters the weld pool after the short circuit is broken.

    -10 - +10
    Factory setting: 0

    -10 = slow immersion, +10 =fast immersion

    Wire speed 1
    Set value for wire speed

    off / 0.1 - 50.0 m/min
    Factory setting: 5 m/min

    Wire speed 2
    Wire speed 2

    0 - 100% (of wire speed 1)
    Factory setting: 50 %

    If a value is set for each of the "Wire speed 2" and "Pulse frequency" setup parameters, the wire speed changes between wire speed 1 and wire speed 2 synchronously with the pulse frequency of the welding current.

    Main current
    Welding current I1

    iWave 300i DC, iWave 300i AC/DC: 3 - 300 A
    iWave 400i DC, iWave 400i AC/DC: 3 - 400 A
    iWave 500i DC, iWave 500i AC/DC: 3 - 500 A
    Factory setting: -

    Pulse frequency

    off / 0.20 - 5000 Hz, 5000 - 10000 Hz
    Factory setting: off

    Wire start-up delay
    Feed delay of welding wire from start of main current phase

    off / 0.1 - 9.9 s
    Factory setting: 5.0 s

    Wire end delay
    Feed delay of welding wire from end of main current phase

    off / 0.1 - 9.9 s
    Factory setting: 5.0 s

    Wire retraction end
    How far the welding wire is retracted after the end of welding

    off / 1 - 50 mm
    Factory setting: 3 mm

    Wire position start
    How far the welding wire is from the workpiece before welding starts

    off / 1 - 50 mm
    Factory setting: 3 mm

    Feeder inching speed

    0.5 - 100.0 m/min
    Factory setting: 5.0 m/min

    1. TIG
    2. TIG process parameters

    TIG gas settings

    Gas pre-flow
    To set the gas flow time before ignition of the arc

    0.0 – 9.9 s
    Factory setting: 0.4 s

    Gas post-flow
    To set the gas flow time after the end of the arc

    auto / 0 – 60 s
    Factory setting: auto

    auto
    Depending on the electrode diameter and welding current, the welding machine calculates and automatically adjusts the optimal gas post-flow time.

    TIG gas switching
    for individual gas shield selection

    auto / 1 / 2
    Factory setting: auto

    auto:

    • The shielding gas (gas 1) is used during the starting-current phase and during the UpSlope.
    • When the main current phase is reached, shielding gas (gas 2) is used.
    • When the welding process is finished, the shielding gas (gas 1) is used during the DownSlope and the final current phase.

    1:
    Shielding gas (gas 1) is used for the entire welding process.

    2:
    Working gas (gas 2) is used for the entire welding process.

    Gas regulator 1

    Gas set value 1 - TIG shielding gas
    Shielding gas flow
    (only in conjunction with option OPT/i TIG gas flow sensor)

    off / 0.5 - 30.0 l/min
    Factory setting: 15.0 l/min

    NOTE!

    To ensure correct functioning of the gas regulator, the inlet pressure at the wirefeeder or welding machine must be at least 4.5 bar (65 psi) when the target flow rate is maintained.

    In order to reach the minimum inlet pressure of 4.5 bar (65 psi), it may be necessary to remove existing flow regulators.

    Gas factor 1 - TIG shielding gas
    depends on the shielding gas used
    (only in connection with the OPT/i TIG gas regulator option)

    auto / 0.90 / 20.0
    Factory setting: auto

    Gas regulator 2

    Gas set value 2 - TIG working gas

    off / 0.5 - 30.0 l/min
    Factory setting: 15.0 l/min

    Gas factor 2 - TIG working gas

    0.90 - 20.0
    Factory setting: 11.82

    1. TIG
    2. TIG process parameters

    Conducting an R/L alignment

    NOTE!

    The R/L alignment must be carried out separately for each welding process.

    Welding circuit resistance R [mOhm]

    The welding circuit resistance is calculated to provide information about the total resistance of the torch hosepack, welding torch, workpiece and grounding cable.

    If, for example, the welding circuit resistance increases after the welding torch has been changed, the following components may be faulty:

    • Torch hosepack
    • Welding torch
    • Ground earth connection to the workpiece
    • Grounding cable

    Welding circuit inductance L [µH]

    The routing of the hosepack has a significant impact on the weld properties.
    A high degree of welding circuit inductance can occur, especially during pulsing and AC welding, depending on the length and routing of the hosepack. The increase in current is limited.

    The welding result can be optimized by changing the routing of the torch hosepack.
    The hosepack must always be routed as shown.

    Perform R/L alignment

    1Process parameters / General / R/L-check / alignment

    The current values are displayed.
    2Select Next

    The 2nd R/L alignment screen is displayed.
    3Follow the instructions on the screen
    4Select Next

    The 3rd R/L alignment screen is displayed.
    5Follow the instructions on the screen
    6Select Next

    The current values are determined.

    After R/L alignment has been performed, a confirmation and the current values are displayed.

    Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging

    Minimum equipment for MMA and CEL welding and for arc air gouging

    Minimum equipment for MMA and CEL welding

    In addition to the iWave welding machine, the following components are required for MMA and CEL welding:

    • Return lead cable
    • Electrode holder with welding power-lead
    • Stick or cellulose electrodes
    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging

    Minimum equipment for MMA and CEL welding and for arc air gouging

    Minimum equipment for MMA and CEL welding

    In addition to the iWave welding machine, the following components are required for MMA and CEL welding:

    • Return lead cable
    • Electrode holder with welding power-lead
    • Stick or cellulose electrodes
    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Minimum equipment for MMA and CEL welding and for arc air gouging

    Minimum equipment for MMA and CEL welding

    In addition to the iWave welding machine, the following components are required for MMA and CEL welding:

    • Return lead cable
    • Electrode holder with welding power-lead
    • Stick or cellulose electrodes
    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Minimum equipment for MMA and CEL welding and for arc air gouging

    Minimum equipment for arc air gouging

    In addition to the iWave welding machine, the following components are required for arc air gouging:

    • The built-in OPT/i TIG PowerConnector option on the welding machine
    • Return lead cable 120i PC
    • PowerConnector - Dinse adapter
    • KRIS 13 arc air gouging torch
    • Compressed air supply
    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging

    Commissioning

    Preparation

    NOTE!

    All TIG components connected to and set up on the welding machine can remain on the welding machine.

    The TIG components do not have to be isolated for MMA welding.

    NOTE!

    Check the packaging or labeling on the stick electrode to determine whether the stick electrodes are to be welded on the positive pole (+) or the negative pole (-)

    iWave AC/DC welding machines can reverse polarity automatically.

    For iWave DC welding machines, the current socket for MMA welding is always polarized to DC-.

    1Set the power switch to - O -
    2Unplug the mains plug
    3Insert the bayonet connector of the electrode holder cable into the current socket for manual metal arc welding and twist it clockwise to lock
     
    4Insert the mains plug
    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Commissioning

    Preparation

    NOTE!

    All TIG components connected to and set up on the welding machine can remain on the welding machine.

    The TIG components do not have to be isolated for MMA welding.

    NOTE!

    Check the packaging or labeling on the stick electrode to determine whether the stick electrodes are to be welded on the positive pole (+) or the negative pole (-)

    iWave AC/DC welding machines can reverse polarity automatically.

    For iWave DC welding machines, the current socket for MMA welding is always polarized to DC-.

    1Set the power switch to - O -
    2Unplug the mains plug
    3Insert the bayonet connector of the electrode holder cable into the current socket for manual metal arc welding and twist it clockwise to lock
     
    4Insert the mains plug
    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging

    Manual Metal Arc Welding

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation and work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    All the work and functions described in this document must only be carried out by technically trained and qualified personnel.

    Read and understand this document in full.

    Read and understand all safety rules and user documentation for this equipment and all system components.

    WARNING!

    Danger from electrical current.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Before starting work, switch off all the devices and components involved and disconnect them from the grid.

    Secure all devices and components involved so they cannot be switched back on.

    After opening the device, use a suitable measuring instrument to check that electrically charged components (such as capacitors) have been discharged.

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Manual Metal Arc Welding

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation and work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    All the work and functions described in this document must only be carried out by technically trained and qualified personnel.

    Read and understand this document in full.

    Read and understand all safety rules and user documentation for this equipment and all system components.

    WARNING!

    Danger from electrical current.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Before starting work, switch off all the devices and components involved and disconnect them from the grid.

    Secure all devices and components involved so they cannot be switched back on.

    After opening the device, use a suitable measuring instrument to check that electrically charged components (such as capacitors) have been discharged.

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Manual Metal Arc Welding

    Manual metal arc welding

    CAUTION!

    Danger of injury and damage from electric shock.

    When the power switch is in position - I -, the stick electrode in the electrode holder is live.

    Ensure that the stick electrode is not touching anyone or any electrically conductive or grounded parts (housing, etc.)

    1Set the power switch to - I -
    2Select "Welding process"

    Alternatively, the welding process can also be selected via the status bar (compare with the procedure described from page (→)).

    An overview of the welding processes is displayed.
    Various welding processes are available depending on the type of welding machine or the function package installed.

    3Select the MMA or CEL welding process

    The welding voltage is applied to the welding socket with a three second delay.

    If the MMA or CEL welding process is selected, a cooling unit, if present, is automatically deactivated. It is not possible to turn it on.

    NOTE!

    Under certain circumstances, it may not be possible to change the set welding parameters of a system component—such as wirefeeder or remote control—on the control panel of the welding machine.

    4Select "MMA welding"

    The MMA welding parameters are displayed.

    5Turn the dial and select the desired welding parameter
    6Press the dial to change the parameter
    7Turn the dial and adjust the parameter
    8If necessary, set the process parameters for user- or application-specific settings on the welding system
    9Initiate welding process
    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Manual Metal Arc Welding

    Welding parameters for manual metal arc welding and CEL welding

    Hot start current

    Setting range: 0 - 200% (of the main current)
    Factory setting: 150%

    Main current

    Setting range:
    iWave 300i DC, iWave 300i AC/DC:
    3 - 300 A
    iWave 400i DC, iWave 400i AC/DC:
    3 - 400 A
    iWave 500i DC, iWave 500i AC/DC:
    3 - 500 A
    Factory setting:-

    Dynamic

    To obtain the best possible welding results, the arc-force dynamic will sometimes need to be adjusted.

    Setting range: 0 - 100% (of the main current)
    Factory setting: 20

    0 ... soft and low-spatter arc
    100 ... harder and more stable arc

    Functional principle:
    At the moment of droplet transfer or in event of a short circuit, a short-term increase in the amperage will occur. To maintain a stable arc, the welding current temporarily rises. If the stick electrode is at risk of sinking into the weld pool, this action prevents the weld pool from solidifying, as well as reducing the duration of the arc's short circuit. The risk of the stick electrode sticking is therefore largely ruled out.

    Polarity

    Setting range: DC- / DC+ / AC
    Factory setting: DC-

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging

    Hot-Start, Soft-Start, Anti-Stick Functions

    Starting current > 100 % (HotStart)

    Advantages

    • Improved ignition properties, even when using electrodes with poor ignition properties
    • Better fusion of parent material in the start phase, therefore less neutralization
    • Slag inclusions largely avoided
    Example of a starting current > 100% (HotStart)
    (1)
    Starting current time
    0-2 s, factory setting 0.5 s
    (2)
    Starting current
    0-200%, factory setting 150%
    (3)
    Main current = set welding current I1

    Operation
    During the set starting current time (1), the welding current I1 (3) rises to the starting current (2).

    The starting current time is set in the Setup menu.

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Hot-Start, Soft-Start, Anti-Stick Functions

    Starting current > 100 % (HotStart)

    Advantages

    • Improved ignition properties, even when using electrodes with poor ignition properties
    • Better fusion of parent material in the start phase, therefore less neutralization
    • Slag inclusions largely avoided
    Example of a starting current > 100% (HotStart)
    (1)
    Starting current time
    0-2 s, factory setting 0.5 s
    (2)
    Starting current
    0-200%, factory setting 150%
    (3)
    Main current = set welding current I1

    Operation
    During the set starting current time (1), the welding current I1 (3) rises to the starting current (2).

    The starting current time is set in the Setup menu.

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Hot-Start, Soft-Start, Anti-Stick Functions

    Starting current < 100 %
    (SoftStart)

    A starting current of < 100% (SoftStart) is suitable for basic electrodes. Ignition is carried out with a low welding current. As soon as the arc is stable, the welding current increases until it reaches the set welding current command value.

    Example of a starting current < 100% (SoftStart)
    Advantages:
    • Improvement of ignition properties with electrodes that ignite at a low welding current
    • Slag inclusions largely avoided
    • Reduction of welding spatter
    (1)
    Starting current
    (2)
    Starting current time
    (3)
    Main current

    The starting current time is set in the MMA menu.

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Hot-Start, Soft-Start, Anti-Stick Functions

    Anti-stick function

    As the arc becomes shorter, the welding voltage may also fall so that the stick electrode is more likely to stick to the workpiece. This may also cause the stick electrode to burn out.

    Electrode burn-out is prevented by activating the anti-stick function. If the stick electrode begins to stick, the welding machine immediately switches the welding current off. The welding process can be resumed without problems once the stick electrode has been detached from the workpiece.

    The anti-stick function is activated and deactivated under:
    Process parameters / Common TIG/MMA/CEL / Electrode.

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging

    Stick electrode / CEL Process parameters

    Stick electrode / CEL Process parameters

    Stick electrode / CEL Process parameters:
    Electrode, CEL

    Process parameters for Components and Monitoring see page (→).

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Stick electrode / CEL Process parameters

    Stick electrode / CEL Process parameters

    Stick electrode / CEL Process parameters:
    Electrode, CEL

    Process parameters for Components and Monitoring see page (→).

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Stick electrode / CEL Process parameters

    Process parameters for stick electrode

    Starting current time
    HotStart

    0.0 - 2.0 s
    Factory setting: 0.5 s

    To obtain the best possible welding result, the HotStart function will sometimes need to be adjusted

    .Advantages:
    • Improved ignition properties, even when using electrodes with poor ignition properties
    • Better fusion of base material in the start phase, therefore less neutralization
    • Slag inclusions largely avoided

    Characteristic
    For selecting the electrode characteristic

    I-constant / 0.1 - 20.0 A/V / P-constant / Arc air gouging (iWave 500 DC and AC/DC only)
    Factory setting: I-constant

    (1)
    Working line for stick electrode
    (2)
    Working line for stick electrode with increased arc length
    (3)
    Working line for stick electrode with reduced arc length
    (4)
    Characteristic for selected parameter "I-constant" (constant welding current)
    (5)
    Characteristic for selected parameter "0.1 -20" (drooping characteristic with adjustable gradient)
    (6)
    Characteristic for selected parameter "P-constant" (constant welding power)
    (7)
    Example of set arc-force dynamic with selected characteristic (4)
    (8)
    Example of set arc-force dynamic with selected characteristic (5) or (6)

    I-constant (constant welding current)

    • If the "I-constant" parameter is set, the welding current is kept constant regardless of the welding voltage. The result is a vertical characteristic (4).
    • The "I-constant" parameter is particularly suitable for rutile electrodes and basic electrodes.

    0.1 - 20.0 A/V (drooping characteristic with adjustable slope)

    • A drooping characteristic (5) can be set using parameter "0.1 - 20". The setting range is from 0.1 A/V (very steep) to 20 A/V (very flat).
    • Setting a flat characteristic (5) is only recommended for cellulose electrodes.

    P-constant (constant welding power)

    • If the "P-constant" parameter is set, the welding power is kept constant regardless of the welding voltage and current. The result is a hyperbolic characteristic (6).
    • The "P-constant" parameter is particularly suitable for cellulose electrodes.
    Arc air gouging
    • Special characteristic for arc air gouging with a carbon electrode
      (for iWave 500 DC and iWave 500 AC/DC only)
    (1)
    Working line for stick electrode
    (2)
    Working line for stick electrode with increased arc length
    (3)
    Working line for stick electrode with reduced arc length
    (4)
    Characteristic for selected parameter "I-constant" (constant welding current)
    (5)
    Characteristic for selected parameter "0.1 -20" (drooping characteristic with adjustable gradient)
    (6)
    Characteristic for selected parameter "P-constant" (constant welding power)
    (7)
    Example of set arc-force dynamic with selected characteristic (5) or (6)
    (8)
    Possible current change with selected characteristic (5) or (6) depending on the welding voltage (arc length)
    (a)
    Operating point with high arc length
    (b)
    Operating point with set welding current IH
    (c)
    Operating point with low arc length

    The characteristics (4), (5) and (6) shown apply when using a stick electrode whose characteristic at a certain arc length corresponds to the working line (1).

    Depending on the set welding current (I), the intersection (operating point) of the characteristics (4), (5) and (6) is shifted along the working line (1). The operating point provides information about the current welding voltage and current welding current.

    With a fixed welding current (IH), the operating point can travel along the characteristics (4), (5) and (6) depending on the current welding voltage. The welding voltage U depends on the arc length.

    If the arc length changes, e.g., according to the working line (2), the operating point is the point where the corresponding characteristic (4), (5) or (6) intersect the working line (2).

    Applies to characteristics (5) and (6): Depending on the welding voltage (arc length), the welding current (I) is also lower or higher, with a constant value for IH.

    Anti-stick

    on / off
    Factory setting: on

    As the arc becomes shorter, the welding voltage may also fall so that the stick electrode is more likely to stick to the workpiece. This may also cause the stick electrode to burn out.

    Electrode burn-out is prevented by activating the anti-stick function. If the stick electrode begins to stick, the welding machine immediately switches the welding current off. The welding process can be resumed without problems once the stick electrode has been detached from the workpiece.

    Break voltage
    Limitation of the welding voltage

    20 - 90 V
    Factory setting: 20 V

    In principle, the arc length depends on the welding voltage. To end the welding process, a significant lifting of the stick electrode is usually required. The parameter allows the welding voltage to be limited to a value, which permits the welding process to be ended by only slightly lifting the stick electrode.

    NOTE!

    If the welding process regularly comes to an unintentional end, set the break voltage parameter to a higher value.

    AC frequency
    Only for AC manual metal arc welding ("Polarity" welding parameter = AC)

    40 - 250 Hz
    Factory setting: 60 Hz

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Stick electrode / CEL Process parameters

    Process parameters for CEL

    Starting current time
    HotStart

    0.0 - 2.0 s
    Factory setting: 0.5 s

    To obtain the best possible welding result, the HotStart function will sometimes need to be adjusted

    .Advantages:
    • Improved ignition properties, even when using electrodes with poor ignition properties
    • Better fusion of base material in the start phase, therefore less neutralization
    • Slag inclusions largely avoided

    Anti-stick

    on / off
    Factory setting: on

    As the arc becomes shorter, the welding voltage may also fall so that the stick electrode is more likely to stick to the workpiece. This may also cause the stick electrode to burn out.

    Electrode burn-out is prevented by activating the anti-stick function. If the stick electrode begins to stick, the welding machine immediately switches the welding current off. The welding process can be resumed without problems once the stick electrode has been detached from the workpiece.

    Break voltage
    Limitation of the welding voltage

    20 - 90 V
    Factory setting: 20 V

    In principle, the arc length depends on the welding voltage. To end the welding process, a significant lifting of the stick electrode is usually required. The parameter allows the welding voltage to be limited to a value, which permits the welding process to be ended by only slightly lifting the stick electrode.

    NOTE!

    If the welding process regularly comes to an unintentional end, set the break voltage parameter to a higher value.

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging

    Arc air gouging (iWave 500 DC and iWave 500 AC/DC)

    Gouging (Arc Air Gouging)

    In arc air gouging, an arc is ignited between a carbon electrode and the workpiece; the base material is melted and blown out with compressed air.
    The operating parameters for arc air gouging are defined in a special characteristic.

    Applications:

    • Removal of shrink holes, pores, or slag inclusions from workpieces
    • Detaching sprues or the processing of entire workpiece surfaces in foundries
    • Edge preparation for heavy plates
    • Preparation and repair of weld seams
    • Finishing of roots or defects
    • Production of air gaps

    IMPORTANT! Arc air gouging is only possible with steel materials!

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Arc air gouging (iWave 500 DC and iWave 500 AC/DC)

    Gouging (Arc Air Gouging)

    In arc air gouging, an arc is ignited between a carbon electrode and the workpiece; the base material is melted and blown out with compressed air.
    The operating parameters for arc air gouging are defined in a special characteristic.

    Applications:

    • Removal of shrink holes, pores, or slag inclusions from workpieces
    • Detaching sprues or the processing of entire workpiece surfaces in foundries
    • Edge preparation for heavy plates
    • Preparation and repair of weld seams
    • Finishing of roots or defects
    • Production of air gaps

    IMPORTANT! Arc air gouging is only possible with steel materials!

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Arc air gouging (iWave 500 DC and iWave 500 AC/DC)

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation and work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    All the work and functions described in this document must only be carried out by technically trained and qualified personnel.

    Read and understand this document in full.

    Read and understand all safety rules and user documentation for this equipment and all system components.

    WARNING!

    Danger from electrical current.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Before starting work, switch off all the devices and components involved and disconnect them from the grid.

    Secure all devices and components involved so they cannot be switched back on.

    After opening the device, use a suitable measuring instrument to check that electrically charged components (such as capacitors) have been discharged.

    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Arc air gouging (iWave 500 DC and iWave 500 AC/DC)

    Preparation

    IMPORTANT! A grounding cable with a PowerConnector and a cable cross-section of 120 mm² is required for arc air gouging. For other return lead cables without a PowerConnector, welding machine must be equipped with the option OPT/i TPS 2. positive socket.
    Furthermore, a Dinse PowerConnector adapter is required for connecting the arc air gouging torch.

    1Set the power switch to - O -
    2Unplug the mains plug
    3Remove the MIG/MAG welding torch
    4Insert the grounding cable into the (-) current socket and lock
    5Connect the other end of the grounding cable to the workpiece
    6Attach the Dinse PowerConnector adapter to the (+) current socket
    7Insert the bayonet connector of the arc air gouging torch into the (+) current socket and twist it clockwise to lock
    8Connect the compressed air connection of the arc air gouging torch to the compressed air supply
    Working pressure: 5 - 7 bar (constant)
    9Clamp the carbon electrode so that the electrode tip protrudes approx. 100 mm from the arc air gouging torch;
    the air outlet openings of the arc air gouging torch must be at the bottom
    10Insert the mains plug
    1. Manual Metal Arc Welding, CEL, Arc air gouging
    2. Arc air gouging (iWave 500 DC and iWave 500 AC/DC)

    Arc air gouging

    CAUTION!

    Danger of injury and damage from electric shock.

    When the power switch is switched to position - I -, the electrode in the arc air gouging torch is live.

    Ensure that the electrode is not touching anyone or any electrically conductive or grounded parts (housing, etc.)

    CAUTION!

    Risk of personal injury due to loud operating noise.

    Use suitable hearing protection during arc air gouging!

    1Set the power switch to - I -
    2Under Process parameters / Common / TIG / Electrode setup, set the "Characteristic" parameter to "Gouging" (last entry)

    NOTE!

    The settings for break voltage and starting current time are ignored.

    3Select OK
    4Under Welding process / Process, select Electrode

    If the MMA welding process is selected, any cooling unit that is present is automatically deactivated. It is not possible to turn it on.

    NOTE!

    Under certain circumstances, it may not be possible to change the set welding parameters of a system component—such as wirefeeder or remote control—on the control panel of the welding machine.

    5Select "MMA welding"

    The arc air gouging parameters are displayed.

    6Set the main current depending on the electrode diameter as specified on the electrode packaging

    NOTE!

    At higher amperages, use both hands to guide the arc air gouging torch!

    Use a suitable welding helmet.

    7Open the compressed air valve on the arc air gouging torch handle
    8Initiate the gouging operation

    The contact angle of the carbon electrode and gouging speed determine the depth of an air gap.

    The parameters for arc air gouging correspond to the welding parameters for MMA welding, see page (→).

    Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG

    Multiprocess PRO

    General

    If the OPT/i TIG Multiprocess PRO option is installed on the welding machine, MIG/MAG welding processes are available without restriction in addition to TIG and MMA welding processes.

    Switching between the individual welding processes takes place either:

    • Using jobs
    • On the welding machine control panel,
      or
    • Using the torch trigger.
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG

    Multiprocess PRO

    General

    If the OPT/i TIG Multiprocess PRO option is installed on the welding machine, MIG/MAG welding processes are available without restriction in addition to TIG and MMA welding processes.

    Switching between the individual welding processes takes place either:

    • Using jobs
    • On the welding machine control panel,
      or
    • Using the torch trigger.
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. Multiprocess PRO

    General

    If the OPT/i TIG Multiprocess PRO option is installed on the welding machine, MIG/MAG welding processes are available without restriction in addition to TIG and MMA welding processes.

    Switching between the individual welding processes takes place either:

    • Using jobs
    • On the welding machine control panel,
      or
    • Using the torch trigger.
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. Multiprocess PRO

    System components

    A Multiprocess-PRO-compatible welding machine can be operated with all iWave system components and, for the MIG/MAG welding process, with all TPSi system components.

    Example:

    iWave 500i AC/DC
    + OPT/i TIG AC Multiprocess PRO
    + CU 1400i Pro/MC cooling unit
    + installation set for front water connection
    + dual head distributor
    + WF 25i MIG/MAG-wirefeeder
    + MHPi MIG/MAG welding torch
    + MHP CON interconnecting hosepack
    + CWF 25i TIG cold wire wirefeeder
    + SpeedNet control cable
    + cold-wire feed TIGi
    + TTB / THP TIG welding torch
    + electrode holder with welding power-lead
    + return lead cable
    + TU Car4 Pro trolley
    + OPT/TU extension cylinder holder TU Car4 Pro

    NOTE!

    For water-cooled welding systems, the coolant connections on the cooling unit must be doubled: 2x flow connections, and 2x return connections.

    The total hosepack length must not exceed 14 m / 45 feet 11 inches for Multiprocess welding systems.

    A Multiprocess-PRO welding system requires only one return lead cable.
    With iWave AC welding machines, the polarity is reversed automatically when the welding process is changed.

    IMPORTANT! For iWave DC welding machines, the return lead cable must be reconnected manually when changing processes.

    WARNING!

    Danger due to live wire electrode and current sockets!
    With Multiprocess-PRO machines, the wire electrode and current sockets of a connected MIG/MAG wirefeeder are live even during TIG operation!

    If touched this can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Do not touch the wire electrode and current sockets.

    Ensure that the wire electrode and current sockets cannot be touched.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG

    Minimum equipment for MIG/MAG welding

    Minimum equipment for MIG/MAG welding

    In addition to the iWave welding machine, the following components are required for MIG/MAG welding:

    • OPT/i TIG Multiprocess PRO
    • MIG/MAG wirefeeder
    • MHP CON MIG/MAG interconnecting hosepack
    • MTG MIG/MAG welding torch
    • Wire electrode
    • MIG/MAG shielding gas supply
    • Return lead cable

    Additionally required for CMT applications:

    • Standard, Pulse, and CMT Welding Packages enabled on the welding machine
    • CMT welding torch incl. CMT drive unit
    • CMT wire buffer
    • OPT/i PushPull installed in the MIG/MAG wirefeeder
    • CMT interconnecting hosepack

    Additionally required for water-cooled applications:

    • Cooling unit with double coolant connections

    The TIG components can remain connected to the welding machine during MIG/MAG welding.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. Minimum equipment for MIG/MAG welding

    Minimum equipment for MIG/MAG welding

    In addition to the iWave welding machine, the following components are required for MIG/MAG welding:

    • OPT/i TIG Multiprocess PRO
    • MIG/MAG wirefeeder
    • MHP CON MIG/MAG interconnecting hosepack
    • MTG MIG/MAG welding torch
    • Wire electrode
    • MIG/MAG shielding gas supply
    • Return lead cable

    Additionally required for CMT applications:

    • Standard, Pulse, and CMT Welding Packages enabled on the welding machine
    • CMT welding torch incl. CMT drive unit
    • CMT wire buffer
    • OPT/i PushPull installed in the MIG/MAG wirefeeder
    • CMT interconnecting hosepack

    Additionally required for water-cooled applications:

    • Cooling unit with double coolant connections

    The TIG components can remain connected to the welding machine during MIG/MAG welding.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG

    MIG/MAG welding processes

    MIG/MAG pulse synergic welding

    MIG/MAG pulse synergic welding is a pulsed arc process with a controlled material transfer.
    In the base current phase, the energy input is reduced to such an extent that the arc barely burns steadily and the surface of the workpiece is preheated. In the pulsing current phase, an accurately timed current pulse guarantees a precise detachment of the weld material droplet.
    This principle guarantees low-spatter welding and precise operation throughout the entire power range.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG welding processes

    MIG/MAG pulse synergic welding

    MIG/MAG pulse synergic welding is a pulsed arc process with a controlled material transfer.
    In the base current phase, the energy input is reduced to such an extent that the arc barely burns steadily and the surface of the workpiece is preheated. In the pulsing current phase, an accurately timed current pulse guarantees a precise detachment of the weld material droplet.
    This principle guarantees low-spatter welding and precise operation throughout the entire power range.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG welding processes

    MIG/MAG standard synergic welding

    MIG/MAG standard synergic welding is a MIG/MAG welding process covering the entire power range of the welding machine with the following arc types:

    Dip transfer arc
    Droplet transfer occurs in the lower power range during the short circuit.

    Intermediate arc
    The intermediate arc alternates irregularly between short circuits and spray transfers. This results in increased spatters. It is not possible to use this arc effectively, so it is better to avoid it.

    Spray arc.
    A short-circuit-free transfer of material in the high power range.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG welding processes

    PMC process

    PMC = Pulse Multi Control

    PMC is a pulsed arc welding process with fast data processing, precise process condition detection, and improved droplet detachment. Faster welding with a stable arc and uniform penetration is possible.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG welding processes

    LSC process

    LSC = Low Spatter Control

    LSC is a low-spatter dip transfer arc process. Before the short-circuit bridge is broken, the current is lowered and reignition occurs at significantly lower welding current values.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG welding processes

    SynchroPulse welding

    SynchroPulse is available for all process (Standard / Pulse / LSC / PMC).
    The cyclic change of the welding power between two operating points with SynchroPulse achieves a finely rippled weld appearance and a non-continuous heat input.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG welding processes

    CMT process

    CMT = Cold Metal Transfer

    A special CMT drive unit is required for the CMT process.

    The reversing wire movement in the CMT process results in droplet detachment with improved dip transfer arc properties.
    The advantages of the CMT process are:

    • Low heat input
    • Reduced spattering
    • Emissions reduction
    • High process stability

    The CMT process is suitable for:

    • Joint welding, overlay welding, and brazing, specifically with high demands in terms of heat input and process stability
    • Light gauge sheet welding with low distortion
    • Special joints, e.g., copper, zinc, steel/aluminum

    NOTE!

    A CMT reference book with sample applications is available,
    ISBN 978-3-8111-6879-4.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG welding processes

    CMT Cycle Step welding process

    CMT Cycle Step is a further development of the CMT welding process. It also requires a special CMT drive unit.

    CMT Cycle Step is the welding process with the lowest heat input.
    The CMT Cycle Step welding process alternates cyclically between CMT welding and pauses of an adjustable duration.
    The welding pauses mean there is less heat input, while the continuity of the weld is maintained.
    Individual CMT cycles are also possible. The size of the CMT welding spots is determined by the number of CMT cycles.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG welding processes

    SlagHammer

    The SlagHammer function is implemented in all steel characteristics.
    In conjunction with a CMT drive unit WF 60i CMT, slag is knocked off the weld seam and wire electrode end by a reversing wire movement without arc before welding.
    Knocking off the slag ensures reliable and precise ignition of the arc.

    A wire buffer is not required for the SlagHammer function.
    The SlagHammer function is automatically executed if a CMT drive unit is present in the welding system.

    An active SlagHammer function is displayed in the status bar below the SFI icon.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG welding processes

    Stitch welding

    With stitch welding, all welding processes can be interrupted cyclically. As such, the heat input is controlled in a targeted manner.
    The welding time, pause time and the number of interval cycles can be set individually (e.g. for producing a rippled weld seam, for tacking thin sheets or, in the case of longer pause times, for simple, automatic spot welding operation).

    Stitch welding is possible with every operating mode.
    In special 2-step mode and special 4-step mode, no interval cycles are executed during the start and end phases. The interval cycles are only executed in the main process phase.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG welding processes

    WireSense

    WireSense is an assistance process for automated applications in which the wire electrode acts as a sensor.
    The wire electrode can be used to check the component position before each weld, real sheet edge heights and their position are reliably detected.

    Advantages:

    • Respond to real component deviations
    • No re-teaching means time and cost savings
    • No calibration of TCP and sensor necessary

    WireSense requires CMT hardware:
    WF 60i Robacta Drive CMT, SB 500i R with wire buffer or SB 60i R, WFi REEL unreeling device

    The CMT Welding Package is not required for WireSense.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG welding processes

    ConstantWire

    ConstantWire is used in laser brazing and other laser welding applications.
    The welding wire is fed to the soldering or weld pool, ignition of an arc is prevented by controlling the wire speed.
    Applications in constant current (CC) and constant voltage (CV) operation are possible.
    The welding wire can be fed either energized for hot wire applications or de-energized for cold wire applications.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG

    MIG/MAG Welding Packages

    General

    The welding machines have a number of different Welding Packages, welding characteristics and welding processes so that the broadest range of materials can be effectively processed.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG Welding Packages

    General

    The welding machines have a number of different Welding Packages, welding characteristics and welding processes so that the broadest range of materials can be effectively processed.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG Welding Packages

    Welding Packages

    The following Welding Packages are available for the iWave welding machines:

    Welding Package Standard
    4,066,012
    (enables MIG/MAG standard synergic welding)

    Welding Package Pulse
    4,066,013
    (enables MIG/MAG pulse-synergic welding)

    Welding Package LSC *
    4,066,014
    (enables the LSC process)

    Welding Package PMC **
    4,066,015
    (enables the PMC process)

    Welding Package CMT ***
    4,066,016
    (enables the CMT process)

    Welding Package ConstantWire
    4,066,019
    (enables constant current or constant voltage operation during brazing)

     

    *
    only in combination with Welding Package Standard
    **
    only in combination with Welding Package Pulse
    ***
    only in combination with Welding Package Standard and Welding Package Pulse

    IMPORTANT! On a welding machine without any Welding Packages, only MIG/MAG standard manual welding is available.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG

    MIG/MAG welding characteristics

    Welding characteristics

    Depending on the welding process and shielding gas combination, various process-optimized welding characteristics are available when selecting the filler metal.

    Examples of welding characteristics:

    • MIG/MAG 3700 PMC Steel 1,0mm M21 - arc blow *
    • MIG/MAG 3450 PMC Steel 1,0mm M21 - dynamic *
    • MIG/MAG 3044 Puls AlMg5 1.2 mm I1 - universal *
    • MIG/MAG 2684 Standard Steel 0.9 mm M22 - root *

    The welding process suffix (*) provides information about special properties and the use of the welding characteristic.
    The characteristics are described as follows:

    Name
    Process
    Properties

    AC additive 1)
    PMC, CMT

    Bead to bead welding characteristic for adaptive structures
    The characteristic changes polarity cyclically to keep heat input low and achieve more stability with a higher deposition rate.

    AC heat control 1)
    PMC, CMT

    The characteristic curve changes polarity cyclically to keep the heat input into the component low. The heat input into the component can be additionally controlled by appropriate correction parameters.

    AC universal 1)
    PMC, CMT

    The characteristic changes polarity cyclically to keep the heat input into the component low and is highly suitable for all common welding tasks.

    additive
    CMT

    Characteristics with reduced heat input and more stability with higher deposition rate for bead to bead welding of adaptive structures

    ADV 2)
    CMT

    Also required:
    Inverter module for an alternating current process
    Negatively poled process phase with less heat input and higher deposition rate

    ADV 2)
    LSC

    Also required:
    Electronic switch for current interruption
    Maximum current reduction by opening the circuit in any desired process phase

    only in connection with TPS 400i LSC ADV

    ADV braze
    CMT

    Characteristics for brazing processes (reliable wetting and good flow of braze material).
    Hardly any welding spatter is produced in the dip transfer arc area. The characteristic is well suited for long hosepacks and return lead cables.

    arc blow
    PMC

    Characteristic for avoiding arc breaks due to arc blow.

    ADV root
    LSC Advanced

    Characteristics for root passes with powerful arc
    Hardly any welding spatter is produced in the dip transfer arc area. The characteristic is well suited for long hosepacks and return lead cables.

    ADV universal
    LSC Advanced

    Characteristic for all common welding tasks, with hardly any welding spatter in the dip transfer arc area. The characteristic is well suited for long hosepacks and return lead cables.

    arcing
    Standard

    Characteristics for a special form of hardfacing on dry and wet substrates
    (e.g., on crushing rollers in the sugar and ethanol industries)

    base
    standard

    Characteristics for a special form of hardfacing on dry and wet substrates
    (e.g., on crushing rollers in the sugar and ethanol industries)

    braze
    CMT, LSC, PMC

    Characteristic for brazing processes (reliable wetting and good flow of braze material).

    braze+
    CMT

    Characteristic for brazing processes with the special Braze+ gas nozzle and high brazing speed (gas nozzle with narrow opening and high flow rate)

    CC/CV
    CC/CV

    Constant current or constant voltage characteristic for power supply operation of the welding machine, a wirefeeder is not required.

    cladding
    CMT, LSC, PMC

    Characteristics for overlay welding with low penetration, low dilution, and wide weld seam flow for improved wetting

    constant current
    PMC

    Constant current characteristic
    for applications where no arc length control is required (no compensation adjustment for stick out changes)

    CW additive
    PMC, ConstantWire

    Characteristic with constant wire speed curve for the additive manufacturing process
    With this characteristic, no arc is ignited, the welding wire is only fed as filler metal.

    dynamic
    CMT, PMC, Puls, Standard

    Characteristic for deep penetration and reliable root formation at high welding speeds

    dynamic +
    PMC

    Characteristic with short arc length for high welding speeds with arc length control independent of the material surface.

    edge
    CMT

    Characteristic for welding corner seams with targeted energy input and high welding speed

    flanged edge
    CMT

    Characteristic for welding flanged welds with targeted energy input and high welding speed

    galvanized
    CMT, LSC, PMC, Puls, Standard

    Characteristics for galvanized sheet surfaces (low risk of zinc pores and reduced penetration)

    galvannealed
    PMC

    Characteristics for iron-zinc coated material surfaces

    gap bridging
    CMT, PMC

    Characteristic for best gap-bridging ability due to very low heat input

    hotspot
    CMT

    Characteristic with hot start sequence, especially for plug welds and MIG/MAG spot welds

    mix 2) / 3)
    PMC

    Also required:
    Welding Packages Pulse and PMC

    Characteristic for the generation of a rippled weld seam.
    The heat input into the component is specifically controlled by the cyclic process change between pulse and dip transfer arc.

    LH fillet weld
    PMC

    Characteristics for LaserHybrid fillet weld applications
    (laser + MIG/MAG process)

    LH flange weld
    PMC

    Characteristics for LaserHybrid corner weld applications
    (laser + MIG/MAG process)

    LH Inductance
    PMC

    Characteristics for LaserHybrid applications with high welding circuit inductance
    (laser + MIG/MAG process)

    LH lap joint
    PMC, CMT

    Characteristics for LaserHybrid lap joint applications
    (laser + MIG/MAG process)

    marking
    Characteristics for marking conductive surfaces

    Characteristic for marking electrically conductive surfaces.
    Marking is performed by low power spark erosion and reversing wire movement.

    mix 2) / 3)
    CMT

    Additionally required:
    CMT drive unit WF 60i Robacta Drive CMT
    Welding Packages Pulse, Standard and CMT

    Characteristic for creating a rippled weld seam.
    The heat input into the component is specifically controlled by the cyclic process change between pulsed arc and CMT.

    mix drive 2)
    PMC

    Additionally required:
    PushPull drive unit WF 25i Robacta Drive or WF 60i Robacta Drive CMT
    Welding Packages Pulse and PMC

    Characteristic for producing a rippled weld seam by cyclic process interruption of the pulse arc and an additional wire movement

    multi arc
    PMC

    Characteristic for components being welded by multiple interacting arcs Well suited for increased welding circuit inductance or mutual welding circuit coupling.

    open root
    LSC, CMT

    Characteristic with powerful arc, especially suitable for root pass with air gap

    PCS 3)
    PMC

    The characteristic changes directly from the pulsed arc to a concentrated spray arc above a certain power. The advantages of pulsed and spray arcs are combined in one characteristic.

    PCS mix
    PMC

    The characteristic changes cyclically between a pulsed or spray arc and a dip transfer arc, depending on the power range. It is especially suitable for vertical-up seams due to the alternating hot and cold supporting process phase.

    pin
    CMT

    Characteristic for welding wire pins to an electrically conductive surface
    The path transition of the wire electrode and the set current curve progression define the appearance of the pin.

    pin picture
    CMT

    Characteristic for welding wire pins with spherical ends onto an electrically conductive surface, especially for creating pin pictures.

    pin print
    CMT

    Characteristic for writing texts, patterns or markings on electrically conductive component surfaces
    Writing takes place by placing individual dots the size of a welding droplet.

    pin spike
    CMT

    Characteristic for welding wire pins with pointed ends onto an electrically conductive surface.

    pipe
    PMC, Puls, Standard

    Characteristics for pipe applications and positional welding on narrow gap applications

    pipe cladding
    PMC, CMT

    Characteristics for the overlay welding of outer pipe claddings with low penetration, low dilution, and wide seam flow

    retro
    CMT, Puls, PMC, Standard

    The characteristic has the same welding properties as the predecessor TransPuls Synergic (TPS) device series.

    ripple drive 2)
    PMC

    Additionally required:
    CMT drive unit WF 60i Robacta Drive CMT

    Characteristic for producing a rippled weld seam by a cyclic process interruption of the pulsed arc and an additional wire movement.
    The seam rippling is similar to that of TIG welds.

    root
    CMT, LSC, Standard

    Characteristics for root passes with powerful arc

    seam track
    PMC, Puls

    Characteristic with amplified current control, especially suitable for the use of a seam tracking system with external current measurement.

    TIME
    PMC

    Characteristic curve for welding with very long electrode extension and T.I.M.E shielding gases to increase the deposition rate.
    (T.I.M.E. = Transferred Ionized Molten Energy)

    TWIN cladding
    PMC

    MIG/MAG tandem welding characteristics for overlay welding with low penetration, low dilution and wide weld flow for improved wetting

    TWIN multi arc
    PMC

    MIG/MAG tandem characteristic for components being welded by multiple interacting arcs. Well suited for increased welding circuit inductance or mutual welding circuit coupling.

    TWIN PCS
    PMC

    The MIG/MAG tandem characteristic changes from the pulsed arc directly to a concentrated spray arc above a certain power. The two arcs are not synchronized.

    TWIN universal
    PMC, Puls, CMT

    MIG/MAG tandem characteristic for all common welding tasks, optimized for the mutual magnetic interaction of the arcs. The two arcs are not synchronized.

    universal
    CMT, PMC, Puls, Standard

    The characteristic is very well suited for all common welding tasks.

    weld+
    CMT

    Characteristics for welding with short electrode extension and the Braze+ gas nozzle (gas nozzle with small orifice and high flow rate)

     

    1)
    Only in conjunction with iWave AC/DC MultiProcess welding machines
    2)
    Welding characteristics with special properties due to additional hardware
    3)
    Mixed process characteristics
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG welding characteristics

    Welding characteristics

    Depending on the welding process and shielding gas combination, various process-optimized welding characteristics are available when selecting the filler metal.

    Examples of welding characteristics:

    • MIG/MAG 3700 PMC Steel 1,0mm M21 - arc blow *
    • MIG/MAG 3450 PMC Steel 1,0mm M21 - dynamic *
    • MIG/MAG 3044 Puls AlMg5 1.2 mm I1 - universal *
    • MIG/MAG 2684 Standard Steel 0.9 mm M22 - root *

    The welding process suffix (*) provides information about special properties and the use of the welding characteristic.
    The characteristics are described as follows:

    Name
    Process
    Properties

    AC additive 1)
    PMC, CMT

    Bead to bead welding characteristic for adaptive structures
    The characteristic changes polarity cyclically to keep heat input low and achieve more stability with a higher deposition rate.

    AC heat control 1)
    PMC, CMT

    The characteristic curve changes polarity cyclically to keep the heat input into the component low. The heat input into the component can be additionally controlled by appropriate correction parameters.

    AC universal 1)
    PMC, CMT

    The characteristic changes polarity cyclically to keep the heat input into the component low and is highly suitable for all common welding tasks.

    additive
    CMT

    Characteristics with reduced heat input and more stability with higher deposition rate for bead to bead welding of adaptive structures

    ADV 2)
    CMT

    Also required:
    Inverter module for an alternating current process
    Negatively poled process phase with less heat input and higher deposition rate

    ADV 2)
    LSC

    Also required:
    Electronic switch for current interruption
    Maximum current reduction by opening the circuit in any desired process phase

    only in connection with TPS 400i LSC ADV

    ADV braze
    CMT

    Characteristics for brazing processes (reliable wetting and good flow of braze material).
    Hardly any welding spatter is produced in the dip transfer arc area. The characteristic is well suited for long hosepacks and return lead cables.

    arc blow
    PMC

    Characteristic for avoiding arc breaks due to arc blow.

    ADV root
    LSC Advanced

    Characteristics for root passes with powerful arc
    Hardly any welding spatter is produced in the dip transfer arc area. The characteristic is well suited for long hosepacks and return lead cables.

    ADV universal
    LSC Advanced

    Characteristic for all common welding tasks, with hardly any welding spatter in the dip transfer arc area. The characteristic is well suited for long hosepacks and return lead cables.

    arcing
    Standard

    Characteristics for a special form of hardfacing on dry and wet substrates
    (e.g., on crushing rollers in the sugar and ethanol industries)

    base
    standard

    Characteristics for a special form of hardfacing on dry and wet substrates
    (e.g., on crushing rollers in the sugar and ethanol industries)

    braze
    CMT, LSC, PMC

    Characteristic for brazing processes (reliable wetting and good flow of braze material).

    braze+
    CMT

    Characteristic for brazing processes with the special Braze+ gas nozzle and high brazing speed (gas nozzle with narrow opening and high flow rate)

    CC/CV
    CC/CV

    Constant current or constant voltage characteristic for power supply operation of the welding machine, a wirefeeder is not required.

    cladding
    CMT, LSC, PMC

    Characteristics for overlay welding with low penetration, low dilution, and wide weld seam flow for improved wetting

    constant current
    PMC

    Constant current characteristic
    for applications where no arc length control is required (no compensation adjustment for stick out changes)

    CW additive
    PMC, ConstantWire

    Characteristic with constant wire speed curve for the additive manufacturing process
    With this characteristic, no arc is ignited, the welding wire is only fed as filler metal.

    dynamic
    CMT, PMC, Puls, Standard

    Characteristic for deep penetration and reliable root formation at high welding speeds

    dynamic +
    PMC

    Characteristic with short arc length for high welding speeds with arc length control independent of the material surface.

    edge
    CMT

    Characteristic for welding corner seams with targeted energy input and high welding speed

    flanged edge
    CMT

    Characteristic for welding flanged welds with targeted energy input and high welding speed

    galvanized
    CMT, LSC, PMC, Puls, Standard

    Characteristics for galvanized sheet surfaces (low risk of zinc pores and reduced penetration)

    galvannealed
    PMC

    Characteristics for iron-zinc coated material surfaces

    gap bridging
    CMT, PMC

    Characteristic for best gap-bridging ability due to very low heat input

    hotspot
    CMT

    Characteristic with hot start sequence, especially for plug welds and MIG/MAG spot welds

    mix 2) / 3)
    PMC

    Also required:
    Welding Packages Pulse and PMC

    Characteristic for the generation of a rippled weld seam.
    The heat input into the component is specifically controlled by the cyclic process change between pulse and dip transfer arc.

    LH fillet weld
    PMC

    Characteristics for LaserHybrid fillet weld applications
    (laser + MIG/MAG process)

    LH flange weld
    PMC

    Characteristics for LaserHybrid corner weld applications
    (laser + MIG/MAG process)

    LH Inductance
    PMC

    Characteristics for LaserHybrid applications with high welding circuit inductance
    (laser + MIG/MAG process)

    LH lap joint
    PMC, CMT

    Characteristics for LaserHybrid lap joint applications
    (laser + MIG/MAG process)

    marking
    Characteristics for marking conductive surfaces

    Characteristic for marking electrically conductive surfaces.
    Marking is performed by low power spark erosion and reversing wire movement.

    mix 2) / 3)
    CMT

    Additionally required:
    CMT drive unit WF 60i Robacta Drive CMT
    Welding Packages Pulse, Standard and CMT

    Characteristic for creating a rippled weld seam.
    The heat input into the component is specifically controlled by the cyclic process change between pulsed arc and CMT.

    mix drive 2)
    PMC

    Additionally required:
    PushPull drive unit WF 25i Robacta Drive or WF 60i Robacta Drive CMT
    Welding Packages Pulse and PMC

    Characteristic for producing a rippled weld seam by cyclic process interruption of the pulse arc and an additional wire movement

    multi arc
    PMC

    Characteristic for components being welded by multiple interacting arcs Well suited for increased welding circuit inductance or mutual welding circuit coupling.

    open root
    LSC, CMT

    Characteristic with powerful arc, especially suitable for root pass with air gap

    PCS 3)
    PMC

    The characteristic changes directly from the pulsed arc to a concentrated spray arc above a certain power. The advantages of pulsed and spray arcs are combined in one characteristic.

    PCS mix
    PMC

    The characteristic changes cyclically between a pulsed or spray arc and a dip transfer arc, depending on the power range. It is especially suitable for vertical-up seams due to the alternating hot and cold supporting process phase.

    pin
    CMT

    Characteristic for welding wire pins to an electrically conductive surface
    The path transition of the wire electrode and the set current curve progression define the appearance of the pin.

    pin picture
    CMT

    Characteristic for welding wire pins with spherical ends onto an electrically conductive surface, especially for creating pin pictures.

    pin print
    CMT

    Characteristic for writing texts, patterns or markings on electrically conductive component surfaces
    Writing takes place by placing individual dots the size of a welding droplet.

    pin spike
    CMT

    Characteristic for welding wire pins with pointed ends onto an electrically conductive surface.

    pipe
    PMC, Puls, Standard

    Characteristics for pipe applications and positional welding on narrow gap applications

    pipe cladding
    PMC, CMT

    Characteristics for the overlay welding of outer pipe claddings with low penetration, low dilution, and wide seam flow

    retro
    CMT, Puls, PMC, Standard

    The characteristic has the same welding properties as the predecessor TransPuls Synergic (TPS) device series.

    ripple drive 2)
    PMC

    Additionally required:
    CMT drive unit WF 60i Robacta Drive CMT

    Characteristic for producing a rippled weld seam by a cyclic process interruption of the pulsed arc and an additional wire movement.
    The seam rippling is similar to that of TIG welds.

    root
    CMT, LSC, Standard

    Characteristics for root passes with powerful arc

    seam track
    PMC, Puls

    Characteristic with amplified current control, especially suitable for the use of a seam tracking system with external current measurement.

    TIME
    PMC

    Characteristic curve for welding with very long electrode extension and T.I.M.E shielding gases to increase the deposition rate.
    (T.I.M.E. = Transferred Ionized Molten Energy)

    TWIN cladding
    PMC

    MIG/MAG tandem welding characteristics for overlay welding with low penetration, low dilution and wide weld flow for improved wetting

    TWIN multi arc
    PMC

    MIG/MAG tandem characteristic for components being welded by multiple interacting arcs. Well suited for increased welding circuit inductance or mutual welding circuit coupling.

    TWIN PCS
    PMC

    The MIG/MAG tandem characteristic changes from the pulsed arc directly to a concentrated spray arc above a certain power. The two arcs are not synchronized.

    TWIN universal
    PMC, Puls, CMT

    MIG/MAG tandem characteristic for all common welding tasks, optimized for the mutual magnetic interaction of the arcs. The two arcs are not synchronized.

    universal
    CMT, PMC, Puls, Standard

    The characteristic is very well suited for all common welding tasks.

    weld+
    CMT

    Characteristics for welding with short electrode extension and the Braze+ gas nozzle (gas nozzle with small orifice and high flow rate)

     

    1)
    Only in conjunction with iWave AC/DC MultiProcess welding machines
    2)
    Welding characteristics with special properties due to additional hardware
    3)
    Mixed process characteristics
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG

    Status bar for MIG/MAG welding

    Status bar

    The status bar is divided into segments and contains the following information:

    (1)
    Currently selected welding process
    (2)
    Currently selected operating mode
    (3)
    Currently set welding program
    (material, shielding gas, characteristic, and wire diameter)
    (4)
    Display process functions

     

    Arc length stabilizer

     

    Penetration stabilizer

     

    SynchroPulse

     

    Spatter Free Ignition, SlagHammer, SFI Hotstart

     

    CMT Cycle Step (only in conjunction with CMT welding process)

     

    Interval

     

     

     

     

    Symbol lights up green:
    Process function is active

     

    Symbol is gray:
    Process function is available but not used for welding

    (5)
    Bluetooth/WLAN status display (only on certified devices)
    • Symbol lights up blue:
      active connection to a Bluetooth participant
    • Symbol is gray:
      Bluetooth participant detected, no active connection

    or

    Display intermediate arc
    (6)
    only in TWIN mode:
    Welding machine number, LEAD / TRAIL / SINGLE

    only in operation with a dual-head wirefeeder WF 25i Dual:
    currently selected welding process line

    With Teachen, Touchsensing, and WireSense:

     

    Teaching - active operation

     

    Teaching - contact with workpiece detected

     

    TouchSensing - active operation

     

    TouchSensing - contact with workpiece detected

     

    WireSense - active operation

     

    WireSense - edge detected

    (7)
    Currently logged in user (when user management is activated)

    or

    the key symbol when the welding machine is switched off
    (e.g., if profile/role "locked" is activated)
    (8)
    Time and date

    NOTE!

    The following functions can be selected and set directly in the status bar:

    (1) Welding process
    (2) Operating mode
    (3) Property of the welding characteristic (e.g., dynamic, root, universal, etc.)
    (4) SynchroPulse, Spatter Free Ignition, Stitch, CMT Cycle Step, penetration stabilizer, arc length stabilizer

    Touch the desired function in the status bar and set it in the window that opens.

    For the characteristic of the welding curve (3) and for SynchroPulse, SFI, etc. (4) additional information can be called up via the respective buttons.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. Status bar for MIG/MAG welding

    Status bar

    The status bar is divided into segments and contains the following information:

    (1)
    Currently selected welding process
    (2)
    Currently selected operating mode
    (3)
    Currently set welding program
    (material, shielding gas, characteristic, and wire diameter)
    (4)
    Display process functions

     

    Arc length stabilizer

     

    Penetration stabilizer

     

    SynchroPulse

     

    Spatter Free Ignition, SlagHammer, SFI Hotstart

     

    CMT Cycle Step (only in conjunction with CMT welding process)

     

    Interval

     

     

     

     

    Symbol lights up green:
    Process function is active

     

    Symbol is gray:
    Process function is available but not used for welding

    (5)
    Bluetooth/WLAN status display (only on certified devices)
    • Symbol lights up blue:
      active connection to a Bluetooth participant
    • Symbol is gray:
      Bluetooth participant detected, no active connection

    or

    Display intermediate arc
    (6)
    only in TWIN mode:
    Welding machine number, LEAD / TRAIL / SINGLE

    only in operation with a dual-head wirefeeder WF 25i Dual:
    currently selected welding process line

    With Teachen, Touchsensing, and WireSense:

     

    Teaching - active operation

     

    Teaching - contact with workpiece detected

     

    TouchSensing - active operation

     

    TouchSensing - contact with workpiece detected

     

    WireSense - active operation

     

    WireSense - edge detected

    (7)
    Currently logged in user (when user management is activated)

    or

    the key symbol when the welding machine is switched off
    (e.g., if profile/role "locked" is activated)
    (8)
    Time and date

    NOTE!

    The following functions can be selected and set directly in the status bar:

    (1) Welding process
    (2) Operating mode
    (3) Property of the welding characteristic (e.g., dynamic, root, universal, etc.)
    (4) SynchroPulse, Spatter Free Ignition, Stitch, CMT Cycle Step, penetration stabilizer, arc length stabilizer

    Touch the desired function in the status bar and set it in the window that opens.

    For the characteristic of the welding curve (3) and for SynchroPulse, SFI, etc. (4) additional information can be called up via the respective buttons.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. Status bar for MIG/MAG welding

    Status bar - current limit reached

    If the characteristic-dependent current limit is reached during MIG/MAG welding, a corresponding message is displayed in the status bar.

    1Select the status bar for detailed information

    The information is displayed.

    2Select "Hide information" to exit
    3Reduce wire speed, welding current, welding voltage or material thickness

    or

    increase distance between contact tip and workpiece

    For more information on the current limit, refer to the section Fault diagnosis / troubleshooting on page (→)

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG

    MIG/MAG Operating Modes

    General

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation.

    Possible serious injury and damage to property.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have read and completely understood these Operating Instructions.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have fully read and understood all of the Operating Instructions for the system components, in particular the safety rules!

    See the Setup menu for information on settings, setting range and units of measurement for the available parameters.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG Operating Modes

    General

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation.

    Possible serious injury and damage to property.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have read and completely understood these Operating Instructions.

    Do not use the functions described here until you have fully read and understood all of the Operating Instructions for the system components, in particular the safety rules!

    See the Setup menu for information on settings, setting range and units of measurement for the available parameters.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG Operating Modes

    Symbols and explanations

    Press the torch trigger | Hold the torch trigger | Release the torch trigger

    GPr
    Gas pre-flow time

    I-S
    Starting-current phase: rapid heating of the base material despite high heat dissipation at the start of welding

    t-S
    Starting current duration

    Starting arc length correction

    SL1
    Slope 1: continuous reduction of the starting current to the welding current

    I
    Welding current phase: even heat input into the base material whose temperature is raised by the advancing heat

    I-E
    Final current phase: to avoid local overheating of the base material caused by heat accumulation at the end of welding. This prevents possible sagging of the weld seam.

    t-E
    Final current duration

    End arc length correction

    SL2
    Slope 2: continuous reduction of the welding current to the final current

    GPo
    Gas post-flow

    SPt
    Spot welding time

    Detailed explanation of the parameters in the chapter Process parameters.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG Operating Modes

    2-step mode

    "2-step mode" is suitable for
    • Tacking work
    • Short weld seams
    • Automatic and robot operation
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG Operating Modes

    4-step mode

    "4-step mode" is suitable for longer weld seams.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG Operating Modes

    Special 4-step mode

    "Special 4-step mode" is ideal for welding aluminum materials. The high thermal conductivity of aluminum is taken into account by the special welding current profile.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG Operating Modes

    Special 2-step mode

    "Special 2-step mode" is ideal for welding in higher power ranges. In special 2-step mode, the arc starts at a lower power, which makes it easier to stabilize.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG Operating Modes

    Spot welding

    The "Spot welding" mode is suitable for welded joints on overlapped sheets.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG

    Preparing for MIG/MAG welding

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from electrical current.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Before starting work, switch off all the devices and components involved and disconnect them from the grid.

    Secure all devices and components involved so they cannot be switched back on.

    WARNING!

    Danger of electrical current due to electrically conductive dust in the device.

    This can result in severe personal injury and damage to property.

    Only operate the device if an air filter is fitted. The air filter is a very important safety device for achieving IP 23 protection.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. Preparing for MIG/MAG welding

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from electrical current.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Before starting work, switch off all the devices and components involved and disconnect them from the grid.

    Secure all devices and components involved so they cannot be switched back on.

    WARNING!

    Danger of electrical current due to electrically conductive dust in the device.

    This can result in severe personal injury and damage to property.

    Only operate the device if an air filter is fitted. The air filter is a very important safety device for achieving IP 23 protection.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. Preparing for MIG/MAG welding

    Correct routing of the interconnecting hosepack

    CAUTION!

    Risk of damage to welding system components due to overheating caused by an incorrectly routed interconnecting hosepack.

    Do not form any loops when routing the interconnecting hosepack

    Do not cover the interconnecting hosepack

    Do not wind the interconnecting hosepack as you get near the gas cylinder and do not wrap it around the gas cylinder

    Correct routing of the interconnecting hosepack

    IMPORTANT!

    • The duty cycle values (D.C.) of the interconnecting hosepack can only be achieved if the hosepack is correctly routed.
    • If the routing of a interconnecting hosepack changes, carry out an R/L alignment (see page (→))!
    • Magnetically compensated interconnecting hosepacks enable routing changes to be made without changing the welding circuit inductance.
      Magnetically compensated interconnecting hosepacks are available from Fronius in lengths of 10 m and above.
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. Preparing for MIG/MAG welding

    Context

    The welding machine is built for TIG welding:

    • Cooling unit, welding machine, and trolley options are assembled on the trolley.
    • The TIG welding torch is connected to the welding machine and to the front of the cooling unit.
    • The return lead cable is connected to the welding machine.
    • The TIG shielding gas supply is connected to the welding machine.

    NOTE!

    All TIG components connected to and set up on the welding machine can remain on the welding machine.

    The TIG components do not need to be terminated for MIG/MAG welding.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. Preparing for MIG/MAG welding

    Setting up MIG/MAG system components (overview)

    NOTE!

    For details on mounting or connecting the MIG/MAG components, refer to the Installation Instructions and Operating Instructions of the respective system components.

    1Switch off the welding machine, disconnect it from the grid, and secure it against being switched on again
    2Set up components required for MIG/MAG welding on the trolley (e.g., swivel pin holder, Duo gas cylinder holder, etc.)
    3Fix the strain-relief devices of the interconnecting hosepack to the trolley and to the wirefeeder
    4Connect the MIG/MAG wirefeeder to the welding machine using the interconnecting hosepack
    (current, SpeedNet, coolant)IMPORTANT! Observe the correct routing of the interconnecting hosepack!
    For details see from page (→).
    5Connect MIG/MAG shielding gas supply to wirefeeder

    When using gas cylinders:

    WARNING!

    Danger of severe injury and damage to property if gas cylinders fall over.

    Place gas cylinders on a solid, level surface so that they remain stable. Secure gas cylinders to prevent them from falling over.

    Observe the safety rules of the gas cylinder manufacturer.

    If the MIG/MAG gas cylinder is to be mounted on the trolley in addition to the TIG gas cylinder, the Duo gas cylinder holder option is required.
    6Connect MIG/MAG welding torch to wirefeeder
    7Insert feed rollers corresponding to the MIG/MAG application into the wirefeeder
    8Set up suitable wear parts for the MIG/MAG application on the welding torch
    9Insert wire spool or basket-type spool and its adapter into the wirefeeder
    10Establish the ground earth connection

    For iWave AC/DC welding machines, use the connected return lead cable.
    The welding machine automatically reverses the polarity of the return lead cable when the welding process is changed.

    For iWave DC welding machines, manually reconnect the return lead cable to the second current socket on the rear of the welding machine.
    IMPORTANT! For optimum weld properties, route the return lead cable as close as possible to the interconnecting hosepack.

    CAUTION!

    Impaired welding results due to a ground earth connection being shared by several welding machines!

    If several welding machines are all welding one component, a common ground earth connection can have a significant effect on the welding results.

    Disconnect welding circuits!

    Provide a separate ground earth connection for each welding circuit!

    Do not use a common return lead cable!

    Further details on the correct routing of the return lead cable from page (→).
    11Connect the welding machine to the grid and switch on
    12Feeding in the wire electrode
    13Setting the contact pressure
    14Adjust the brake
    15Perform R/L adjustment
    For details, see from page (→).
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG

    MIG/MAG and CMT welding

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation and work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    All the work and functions described in this document must only be carried out by technically trained and qualified personnel.

    Read and understand this document in full.

    Read and understand all safety rules and user documentation for this equipment and all system components.

    WARNING!

    Danger from electrical current.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Before starting work, switch off all the devices and components involved and disconnect them from the grid.

    Secure all devices and components involved so they cannot be switched back on.

    After opening the device, use a suitable measuring instrument to check that electrically charged components (such as capacitors) have been discharged.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG and CMT welding

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation and work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    All the work and functions described in this document must only be carried out by technically trained and qualified personnel.

    Read and understand this document in full.

    Read and understand all safety rules and user documentation for this equipment and all system components.

    WARNING!

    Danger from electrical current.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Before starting work, switch off all the devices and components involved and disconnect them from the grid.

    Secure all devices and components involved so they cannot be switched back on.

    After opening the device, use a suitable measuring instrument to check that electrically charged components (such as capacitors) have been discharged.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG and CMT welding

    Setting the welding process and operating mode via the status bar

    1Select the symbol for the welding process in the status bar

    An overview of the welding processes is displayed.

    NOTE!

    Depending on the device type, equipment, and available WeldingPackages, the number and sequence of the welding processes displayed may vary.

    2Select the desired welding process
    3Select the symbol for the operating mode in the status bar

    An overview of operating modes is displayed.

    NOTE!

    Depending on the device type, equipment, and available WeldingPackages, the number and sequence of the operating modes displayed may vary.

    4Select the desired operating mode
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG and CMT welding

    Setting the welding process and operating mode via the menu bar

    The welding process and operating mode can alternatively be set via the menu bar.

    NOTE!

    Depending on the device type, equipment, and available WeldingPackages, the number and sequence of the welding processes displayed may vary.

    1Select "Welding process"
    2Select "Process"

    An overview of the welding processes is displayed.
    Various welding processes are available depending on the type of welding machine or the function package installed.

    3Select the desired welding process
    4Select "Mode"

    An overview of operating modes is displayed:

    • 2-step mode
    • 4-step mode
    • Special 2-step mode
    • Special 4-step mode
    • Spot welding
    5Select the desired operating mode
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG and CMT welding

    Selecting the filler metal and shielding gas

    1Select "Welding process"
    2Select "Filler metal"
    3Select "Change material settings"
    4Turn the selection dial and select the desired filler metal
    5Select "Next"/press the selection dial
    6Turn the selection dial and select the desired wire diameter
    7Select "Next"/press the selection dial
    8Turn the selection dial and select the desired shielding gas
    9Select "Next"/press the selection dial

    NOTE!

    The available characteristics for each process are not displayed if only one characteristic is available for the selected filler metal.

    The confirmation step of the filler metal wizard follows directly, steps 10 - 14 are omitted.

    10Turn the selection dial and select the desired process
    11Press the selection dial to select the desired characteristic (blue background)
    12Turn the selection dial and select the desired characteristic
    13Press the selection dial and accept the selected characteristic (white background)
    14Select "Next"

    The confirmation step of the filler metal wizard is displayed:

    15Select "Save"/press the selection dial

    The selected filler metal and associated characteristics for each process are saved.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG and CMT welding

    Setting the welding parameters

    1Select "Welding"
    2Turn the selection dial to select the desired welding parameter
    3Press the selection dial to change the parameter

    The value of the parameter is displayed as a horizontal scale, the parameter is illustrated by means of an animated graphic:

    e.g., parameter welding current

    The selected parameter can now be changed.

    4Change the parameter by turning the selection dial

    The new parameter value is applied immediately.
    If one of the wire feed speed, sheet thickness, welding current, or welding voltage parameters is changed during Synergic welding, all the other parameters are immediately modified accordingly.

    5Press the selection dial to access the welding parameters overview
    6If necessary, set the process parameters for user- or application-specific settings on the welding system

    NOTE!

    If there is a WF 25i Dual dual-head wirefeeder in the welding system, set the welding parameters and process parameters for both welding process lines separately.

    1Select the currently selected welding process line in the status bar
    2Set welding parameters and process parameters for both welding process lines
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG and CMT welding

    Adjusting the quantity of shielding gas

    1Open the gas cylinder valve
    2Press the Gas-test button

    Gas flows out.
    The "Gas purging" dialog box appears on the display, indicating the remaining gas purging duration. If there is a gas regulator or gas sensor in the welding system, the actual gas value is also displayed.
    3Turn the adjusting screw on the bottom of the gas pressure regulator until the manometer displays the desired quantity of shielding gas
    4Press the Gas-test button

    The gas flow stops.
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG and CMT welding

    MIG/MAG or CMT welding

    1Select "Welding" to display the welding parameters

    CAUTION!

    Danger due to emerging wire electrode.

    Personal injury may result.

    Hold the welding torch so that the tip of the welding torch points away from the face and body.

    Wear suitable protective goggles.

    Do not point the welding torch at people.

    Ensure that the wire electrode can only intentionally make contact with electrically conductive objects.

    2Press the torch trigger and start welding

    Each time at the end of welding, the welding data are saved depending on the setting; Hold or Mean is shown on the display (see also page (→)).

    NOTE!

    Under certain circumstances, it may not be possible to change the set welding parameters of a system component—such as wirefeeder or remote control—on the control panel of the welding machine.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG

    Spot welding and stitch welding

    Spot welding

    Spot welding is used on welded joints on overlapping sheets that are only accessible on one side.

    1Select the desired welding process:
    • via the status bar / Operating mode - see from page(→), work step 3
      or
    • via the menu bar - see from page (→)
    2Activate spot welding:
    1. Select the symbol for the operating mode in the status bar
    2. Select spot welding
      or
    1. Select Welding process / Operating mode / Spot welding
    3Select "Process parameters"
    4Select "General"
    5Select "Spot welding"

    The spot welding time parameter is displayed.
    6Enter the desired value for the spot welding time: Press and turn the dial

    Setting range: 0.1 - 10.0 s
    Factory setting: 1.0 s
    7Apply value with OK

    NOTE!

    4-step mode is set by default for spot welding.

    Press torch trigger - The spot welding process runs until end of the spot welding time - pressing again stops spot welding prematurely

    The spot welding parameter can be changed to 2-step under Defaults / System / Mode Setup
    (further information on 2-step and 4-step mode for spot welding can be found from page (→) onwards)

    8Select filler metal, wire diameter, and shielding gas
    9Open the gas cylinder valve
    10Adjust the quantity of shielding gas

    WARNING!

    Danger due to emerging wire electrode.

    Serious personal injuries may result.

    Hold the welding torch so that the tip of the welding torch points away from the face and body.

    Wear suitable protective goggles.

    Do not point the welding torch at people.

    Ensure that the wire electrode can only intentionally make contact with electrically conductive objects.

    11Spot welding

    Procedure for creating a welding spot:

    1Keep the welding torch vertical
    2Press and release the torch trigger
    3Maintain the position of the welding torch
    4Wait for the gas post-flow time
    5Raise the welding torch

    NOTE!

    The selected weld start and weld end parameters are also active when spot welding.

    Under Process parameters / General MIG/MAG / Weld-Start/Weld-End, a weld start/weld end treatment can thus be stored for spot welding.

    If final current time is active, the end of welding is not after the set spot welding time, but only after the set slope and final current times have elapsed.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. Spot welding and stitch welding

    Spot welding

    Spot welding is used on welded joints on overlapping sheets that are only accessible on one side.

    1Select the desired welding process:
    • via the status bar / Operating mode - see from page(→), work step 3
      or
    • via the menu bar - see from page (→)
    2Activate spot welding:
    1. Select the symbol for the operating mode in the status bar
    2. Select spot welding
      or
    1. Select Welding process / Operating mode / Spot welding
    3Select "Process parameters"
    4Select "General"
    5Select "Spot welding"

    The spot welding time parameter is displayed.
    6Enter the desired value for the spot welding time: Press and turn the dial

    Setting range: 0.1 - 10.0 s
    Factory setting: 1.0 s
    7Apply value with OK

    NOTE!

    4-step mode is set by default for spot welding.

    Press torch trigger - The spot welding process runs until end of the spot welding time - pressing again stops spot welding prematurely

    The spot welding parameter can be changed to 2-step under Defaults / System / Mode Setup
    (further information on 2-step and 4-step mode for spot welding can be found from page (→) onwards)

    8Select filler metal, wire diameter, and shielding gas
    9Open the gas cylinder valve
    10Adjust the quantity of shielding gas

    WARNING!

    Danger due to emerging wire electrode.

    Serious personal injuries may result.

    Hold the welding torch so that the tip of the welding torch points away from the face and body.

    Wear suitable protective goggles.

    Do not point the welding torch at people.

    Ensure that the wire electrode can only intentionally make contact with electrically conductive objects.

    11Spot welding

    Procedure for creating a welding spot:

    1Keep the welding torch vertical
    2Press and release the torch trigger
    3Maintain the position of the welding torch
    4Wait for the gas post-flow time
    5Raise the welding torch

    NOTE!

    The selected weld start and weld end parameters are also active when spot welding.

    Under Process parameters / General MIG/MAG / Weld-Start/Weld-End, a weld start/weld end treatment can thus be stored for spot welding.

    If final current time is active, the end of welding is not after the set spot welding time, but only after the set slope and final current times have elapsed.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. Spot welding and stitch welding

    Stitch welding

    1Select the desired welding process:
    • via the status bar - see from page (→)
      or
    • via the menu bar - see from page (→)
    2Select the operating mode for stitch welding:
    • via the status bar - see from page (→)
      or
    • via the menu bar - see from page (→)
    3Select the filler metal, wire diameter, and shielding gas
    4Set the desired welding parameters depending on the selected welding process
    5Activate stitch welding:
    1. Select the process functions display in the status bar
    2. Select interval
      or
    1. Under Process parameters / Common / Interval set the Interval parameter to "on"

      Stitch welding is activated, the Interval display lights up in the status bar.
    6Set the other parameters for stitch welding:
    Stitch welding time, interval pause time, interval cycles
    7Open the gas cylinder valve
    8Adjust the quantity of shielding gas

    WARNING!

    Danger due to emerging wire electrode.

    Serious personal injuries may result.

    Hold the welding torch so that the tip of the welding torch points away from the face and body.

    Wear suitable protective goggles.

    Do not point the welding torch at people.

    Ensure that the wire electrode can only intentionally make contact with electrically conductive objects.

    9Stitch welding

    Procedure for stitch welding:

    1Keep the welding torch vertical
    2Depending on the set operating mode:
    Press and hold the torch trigger (2-step mode)
    Press and release the torch trigger (4-step mode)
    3Maintain the position of the welding torch
    4Wait for the welding interval
    5Position the welding torch at the next point
    6To stop stitch welding, depending on the set operating mode:
    Release the torch trigger (2-step mode)
    Press and release the torch trigger (4-step mode)
    7Wait for the gas post-flow time
    8Raise the welding torch

    Notes on stitch welding

    For PMC characteristics, the setting of the SFI parameter influences the re-ignition behavior in interval operation:

    SFI = on
    Re-ignition occurs with SFI.

    SFI = off
    Re-ignition takes place by means of touchdown ignition.

    For aluminum alloys, SFI is always used for pulse and PMC ignition. SFI ignition cannot be deactivated.

    If the SlagHammer function is stored on the selected characteristic, faster and more stable SFI ignition takes place in conjunction with a CMT drive unit and a wire buffer.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG

    MIG/MAG and CMT welding parameters

    Welding parameters for MIG/MAG pulse synergic welding and PMC welding

    For MIG/MAG pulse synergic welding and PMC welding, the following welding parameters can be set and displayed under "welding":

    Wire speed 1)

    0.5 - max 2) 3) m/min / 19.69 - max 2) 3) ipm.

    Material thickness 1)

    0.1 - 30.0 mm 2) / 0.004 - 1.18 2) in.

    Current 1) [A]

    Setting range: depends on the selected welding process and welding program

    Before welding begins, the device automatically displays a standard value based on the programmed parameters. The actual value is displayed during welding.

    Arc length correction
    For correcting the arc length

    -10 - +10
    Factory setting: 0

    - ... shorter arc length
    0 ... neutral arc length
    + ... longer arc length

    When the arc length correction is adjusted, the welding voltage changes while the welding current and the wire speed remain constant.

    The display shows the voltage value with unchanged arc length correction (1), the voltage value corresponding to the currently set arc length correction (2), and the active arc length correction symbol (3).

    NOTE!

    For certain PMC characteristics, the arc length correction cannot be adjusted when the arc length stabilizer is active.

    In this case, the arc length correction is not displayed in the welding parameters.

    Pulse correction
    For correcting the pulse energy in the pulsed arc

    -10 – +10
    Factory setting: 0

    - ... lower droplet detachment force
    0 ... neutral droplet detachment force
    + ... increased droplet detachment force

    NOTE!

    SynchroPulse can be activated via the status bar.

    (see page (→))

    If SynchroPulse is activated, the SynchroPulse parameters are also displayed with the welding parameters.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG and CMT welding parameters

    Welding parameters for MIG/MAG pulse synergic welding and PMC welding

    For MIG/MAG pulse synergic welding and PMC welding, the following welding parameters can be set and displayed under "welding":

    Wire speed 1)

    0.5 - max 2) 3) m/min / 19.69 - max 2) 3) ipm.

    Material thickness 1)

    0.1 - 30.0 mm 2) / 0.004 - 1.18 2) in.

    Current 1) [A]

    Setting range: depends on the selected welding process and welding program

    Before welding begins, the device automatically displays a standard value based on the programmed parameters. The actual value is displayed during welding.

    Arc length correction
    For correcting the arc length

    -10 - +10
    Factory setting: 0

    - ... shorter arc length
    0 ... neutral arc length
    + ... longer arc length

    When the arc length correction is adjusted, the welding voltage changes while the welding current and the wire speed remain constant.

    The display shows the voltage value with unchanged arc length correction (1), the voltage value corresponding to the currently set arc length correction (2), and the active arc length correction symbol (3).

    NOTE!

    For certain PMC characteristics, the arc length correction cannot be adjusted when the arc length stabilizer is active.

    In this case, the arc length correction is not displayed in the welding parameters.

    Pulse correction
    For correcting the pulse energy in the pulsed arc

    -10 – +10
    Factory setting: 0

    - ... lower droplet detachment force
    0 ... neutral droplet detachment force
    + ... increased droplet detachment force

    NOTE!

    SynchroPulse can be activated via the status bar.

    (see page (→))

    If SynchroPulse is activated, the SynchroPulse parameters are also displayed with the welding parameters.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG and CMT welding parameters

    Welding parameters for MIG/MAG standard synergic welding, LSC welding, and CMT welding

    For MIG/MAG standard synergic welding, LSC welding, and CMT welding, the following welding parameters can be set and displayed in the "welding parameters" menu item:

    Wire speed 1)

    0.5 - max 2) 3) m/min / 19.69 - max 2) 3) ipm.

    Material thickness 1)

    0.1 - 30.0 mm 2) / 0.004 - 1.18 2) in.

    Current 1) [A]

    Setting range: depends on the selected welding process and welding program

    Before welding begins, the device automatically displays a standard value based on the programmed parameters. The actual value is displayed during welding.

    Arc length correction
    For correcting the arc length

    -10 - +10
    Factory setting: 0

    - ... shorter arc length
    0 ... neutral arc length
    + ... longer arc length

    When the arc length correction is adjusted, the welding voltage changes while the welding current and the wire speed remain constant.

    The display shows the voltage value with unchanged arc length correction (1), the voltage value corresponding to the currently set arc length correction (2), and the active arc length correction symbol (3).

    NOTE!

    For certain PMC characteristics, the arc length correction cannot be adjusted when the arc length stabilizer is active.

    In this case, the arc length correction is not displayed in the welding parameters.

    Dynamic correction
    for setting the short circuit current and the current to short-circuit breakup

    -10 - +10
    Factory setting: 0

    -10
    harder arc (higher current in case of short circuit breakup, increased welding spatter)

    +10
    softer arc (lower current in case of short circuit breakup, reduced welding spatter formation)

    NOTE!

    SynchroPulse can be activated via the status bar.

    (see page (→))

    If SynchroPulse is activated, the SynchroPulse parameters are also displayed with the welding parameters.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG and CMT welding parameters

    Welding parameters for MIG/MAG standard manual welding

    For MIG/MAG standard manual welding, the following welding parameters can be set and displayed in the "Welding" menu item:

    Voltage 1) [V]

    Setting range: depends on the selected welding process and welding program

    Before welding begins, the device automatically displays a standard value based on the programmed parameters. The actual value is displayed during welding.

    Wire speed 1)
    To set a harder and more stable arc

    0.5 - max 2) m/min / 19.69 - max 2) ipm.

    Arc-force dynamic:
    For influencing the short-circuiting dynamic at the instant of droplet transfer

    0 - 10
    Factory setting: 1.5

    0 ... harder and more stable arc
    10 ... softer and low spatter arc

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG and CMT welding parameters

    Explanation of footnotes

    1)
    Synergic parameters
    If a synergic parameter is changed, all other synergic parameters are automatically set as well due to the synergic function.
    The actual setting range depends on the welding machine and wire speed, as well as which welding program was selected.
    2)
    The actual setting range depends on the selected welding program.
    3)
    The maximum value depends on the actual wire speed.
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG

    MIG/MAG process parameters

    MIG/MAG process parameters

    MIG/MAG process parameters:
    Weld start / Weld end, Gas setup, Process control, SynchroPulse, Process mix, CMT Cycle Step, Spot welding, R/L-check / alignment

    Process parameters for components and monitoring see page (→).

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    MIG/MAG process parameters

    MIG/MAG process parameters:
    Weld start / Weld end, Gas setup, Process control, SynchroPulse, Process mix, CMT Cycle Step, Spot welding, R/L-check / alignment

    Process parameters for components and monitoring see page (→).

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Process parameters for weld start / weld end

    The following process parameters can be set and displayed for the start and end of welding:

    Special 2/4-step mode parameters

    Starting current 
    To set the starting current for MIG/MAG welding (e.g., start of welding for aluminum)

    0 - 400  % (of the welding current)
    Factory setting: 135%

    Start arc length correction
    For correcting arc length at weld start

    -10 - -0.1 / auto / 0.0 - 10.0
    Factory setting: auto

    - ... shorter arc length
    0 ... neutral arc length
    + ... longer arc length

    auto:
    The value set in the welding parameters is adopted

    Starting current time
    For specifying how long the starting current is to be active 

    off / 0.1 - 10.0 s
    Factory setting: off

    Slope 1 
    To set the time during which the starting current is reduced or increased to the welding current

    0.0 – 9.9 s
    Factory setting: 1.0 s

    Slope 2 
    To set the time during which the welding current is reduced or increased to the final current.

    0.0 – 9.9 s
    Factory setting: 1.0 s

    Final current 
    To set the final current in order to

    1. prevent a build-up of heat at the end of welding and
    2. fill the end-crater in the case of aluminum

    0 – 400% (of the welding current)
    Factory setting: 50%

    End arc length correction
    For correcting the arc length at the end of welding

    -10 - -0.1 / auto / 0.0 - 10.0
    Factory setting: auto

    - ... shorter arc length
    0 ... neutral arc length
    + ... longer arc length

    auto:
    The value set in the welding parameters is adopted

    Final current time
    For specifying how long the final current is to be active

    off / 0.1 - 10.0 s
    Factory setting: off


    SFI parameter

    SFI
    to activate / deactivate the function SFI (Spatter Free Ignition of the arc)

    SFI causes an almost spatter-free ignition of the arc due to a controlled starting current curve with synchronized wire retraction movement.

    off/on
    Factory setting: off

    NOTE!

    SFI is permanently integrated in certain welding processes and cannot be deactivated.

    If SH is displayed in the status bar for SFI, the SlagHammer function is active in addition to SFI.
    SFI and SH cannot be deactivated.

    SFI Hotstart
    To set a HotStart time in conjunction with SFI ignition

    During SFI ignition, a spray arc phase runs within the set HotStart time. This increases the heat input regardless of the operating mode and thus ensures a deeper penetration from the start of welding.

    off / 0.01 - 2.00 s
    Factory setting: off


    Manual welding parameters

    Ignition current (manual) 
    To set the ignition current for MIG/MAG standard manual welding

    100 - 550 A (iWave 300i)
    100 - 600 A (iWave 400i)
    100 - 650 A (iWave 500i)
    Factory setting: 500 A

    Wire retraction (manual) 
    To set the wire retraction value (= combined value from wire retraction and a time) during MIG/MAG standard manual welding
    The wire retraction depends on the equipment on the welding torch.

    0.0 – 10.0
    Factory setting: 0.0


    Wire retraction

    Wire retraction 
    To set the wire retraction value (= combined value from wire retraction and a time)
    The wire retraction depends on the equipment on the welding torch.

    0.0 – 10.0
    Factory setting: 0.0

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Process parameters for gas setup

    The following process parameters can be set and displayed for the gas setup:

    Gas pre-flow 
    To set the gas flow time before the arc is ignited

    0 – 9.9  s
    Factory setting: 0.1 s

    Gas post-flow 
    To set the gas flow time after the arc has gone out

    0 - 60 s
    Factory setting: 0.5 s

    Gas factor 
    Depends on the shielding gas used
    (only in conjunction with the OPT/i gas controller option)

    auto / 0.90 - 20.00
    Factory setting: auto
    (for standard gases from the Fronius welding database, the correction factor is set automatically)

    Gas set value
    Shielding gas flow rate
    (only in conjunction with OPT/i gas flow sensor option)

    off / auto / 0.5 - 30.0 l/min
    Factory setting: 15.0 l/min

    NOTE!

    To ensure correct functioning gas regulator, the inlet pressure at the wirefeeder or welding machine must be at least 4.5 bar (65 psi) when the target flow rate is maintained.

    In order to reach the minimum inlet pressure of 4.5 bar (65 psi), it may be necessary to remove existing flow regulators.


    Settings for gas set value "auto"

    When set to "auto", the gas setpoint automatically adjusts to the current welding current within a set current range.

    Lower current
    for setting the lower current range limit

    0 - max. A
    Factory setting: 50 A

    Gas set value at lower current

    0.5 - 30.0 l/min
    Factory setting: 8.0 l/min

    Lower current
    for setting the upper current range limit

    0 - max. A
    Factory setting: 400 A

    Gas set value at upper current

    0.5 - 30.0 l/min
    Factory setting: 25.0 l/min


    In Job Mode, the values of the above parameters can be saved individually for each job.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Process parameters for process control

    The following process parameters can be set and displayed for process control:

    • Penetration stabilizer
    • Arc length stabilizer
    • Combination of penetration stabilizer and arc length stabilizer
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Penetration stabilizer

    The penetration stabilizer is used to set the max. permissible wire speed change in order to keep the welding current and thereby the penetration stable or constant with variable stickout.

    The penetration stabilizer parameter is only available if the WP PMC (Welding Process Pulse Multi Control) option or the WP LSC (Welding Process Low Spatter Control) option is enabled on the welding machine.

    auto / 0.0 – 10.0 m/min (ipm)
    Factory setting: 0 m/min

    auto
    A value of 10 m/min is stored for all characteristics, the penetration stabilizer is activated.

    0
    The penetration stabilizer is not activated.
    The wire speed remains constant.

    0.1 – 10.0
    The penetration stabilizer is activated.
    The welding current remains constant.

    Application examples

    Penetration stabilizer = 0 m/min (not activated)

    Penetration stabilizer = 0 m/min (not activated)

    A change in the contact tube distance (h) causes a change in resistance in the welding circuit due to longer electrode extension (s2).
    The constant voltage control for constant arc length causes a reduction of the average current and thus a smaller penetration depth (x2).

    Penetration stabilizer = n m/min (activated)

    Penetration stabilizer = n m/min (activated)

    Value presetting for the penetration stabilizer causes a constant arc length without large current changes in the event of a stickout change (s1 ==> s2).
    The penetration (x1, x2) remains approximately the same and stable.

    Penetration stabilizer = 0.5 m/min (activated)

    Penetration stabilizer = 0.5 m/min (activated)

    In order to keep the change in welding current as low as possible during a stickout change (s1 ==> s3), the wire speed is increased or reduced by 0.5 m/min.
    In the example shown, the stabilizing effect is maintained up to the set value of 0.5 m/min (position 2) without any change in current.

    I ... Welding current vD  ... Wire speed

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Arc length stabilizer

    Arc length stabilizer
    The arc length stabilizer uses short-circuit control to force short arcs that are advantageous for welding and keeps them stable even with a variable electrode extension or in the event of external disturbances.

    The arc length stabilizer parameter is only available if the WP PMC (Welding Process Pulse Multi Control) option is enabled on the welding machine.

    0.0 / auto / 0.1 - 5.0 (action of the stabilizer)
    Factory setting: 0.0

    0.0
    The arc length stabilizer is deactivated.

    auto

    • For inert gases (100% Ar, He, etc.) a value = 0 is stored.
    • For the remaining materials / gas combinations, a characteristic-dependent value between 0.2 - 0.5 is stored.
    • From a wire speed of 16 m/min a value = 0 is stored

    0.1 - 5.0
    The arc length stabilizer is activated.
    The arc length is reduced until short circuits occur.

    NOTE!

    If the arc length stabilizer is activated, the normal arc length correction is only effective at weld start.

    The arc length correction is then no longer displayed in the welding parameters.

    Application examples

    Arc length stabilizer = 0 / 0.5 / 2.0

      Arc length stabilizer = 0

      Arc length stabilizer = 0.5

      Arc length stabilizer = 2

    Arc length stabilizer = 0 / 0.5 / 2.0

    Activating the arc length stabilizer reduces the arc length until short circuits occur. This allows the advantages of a short, stably controlled arc to be better exploited.

    Increasing the arc length stabilizer causes a further shortening of the arc length (L1 ==> L2 ==> L3). The advantages of a short, stably controlled arc can be better exploited.

    Arc length stabilizer for weld seam profile and position changes

    Arc length stabilizer not activated

    Weld seam profile or welding position changes can negatively influence the welding result

    Arc length stabilizer activated

    Since the number and duration of the short circuits are controlled, the properties of the arc remain the same when the weld seam profile or welding position is changed.

    I ... Welding current vD ... Wire speed U ... Welding voltage

    * ... Number of short circuits

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Combination of penetration stabilizer and arc length stabilizer

    Example: Stick out change

    Arc length stabilizer without penetration stabilizer

    The advantages of a short arc are maintained even if the stick out is changed, since the short-circuit properties stay the same.

    Arc length stabiliser with penetration stabilizer

    If the stick out is changed with the penetration stabilizer activated, the penetration also stays the same.
    The short circuit behaviour is controlled by the arc length stabilizer.

    I ... Welding current vD ... Wire speed U ... Welding voltage

    * ... Number of short circuits Δs ... Stick out change

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Process parameters for SynchroPulse

    The following process parameters can be set for SynchroPulse welding:

    (1) SynchroPulse 
    To activate/deactivate SynchroPulse

    off / on
    Factory setting: on

    (2) Wire speed
    To set the average wire speed and therefore the welding power for SynchroPulse

    For example: 2 - 25 m/min (ipm)
    (Depending on wire speed and welding characteristic)
    Factory setting: 5.0 m/min

    (3) Delta wire feed
    To set the delta wire feed:
    With SynchroPulse, the set wire speed is alternately increased/decreased by the delta wire feed. The parameters concerned are modified accordingly to match the acceleration/deceleration of the wire speed.

    0.1 – 6.0 m/min / 5 – 235 ipm
    Factory setting: 2.0 m/min

    NOTE!

    The maximum adjustable delta wire feed of 6 m/min (235 ipm) is only possible up to a frequency of approx. 3 Hz.

    In the frequency range of 3 - 10 Hz, the adjustable delta wire feed decreases.

    (4) Frequency
    To set the SynchroPulse frequency

    0.5 - 10.0 Hz
    Factory setting: 3.0 Hz

    NOTE!

    In TWIN operation, the frequency setting on the lead welding machine also affects the trail welding machine.

    Adjusting the frequency on the trail welding machine has no effect.

    (5) Duty Cycle (high) 
    For weighting the duration of the higher operating point in a SynchroPulse period

    10 – 90%
    Factory setting: 50 Hz

    NOTE!

    In TWIN operation, the Duty Cycle (high) setting on the lead welding machine also affects the trail welding machine.

    Setting the Duty Cycle (high) on the trail welding machine has no effect.

    (6) Arc correction high 
    For correcting the arc length with SynchroPulse at the higher operating point (= average wire speed plus delta wire feed)

    -10.0 – +10.0
    Factory setting: 0.0

    - ... short arc
    0 ... uncorrected arc length
    + ... longer /arc

    NOTE!

    If SynchroPulse is activated, the normal arc length correction has no effect on the welding process.

    The arc length correction is then no longer displayed in the welding parameters.

    (7) Arc correction low,
    For correcting the arc length with SynchroPulse at the lower operating point (= average wire speed less delta wire feed)

    -10.0 – +10.0
    Factory setting: 0.0

    - ... short arc
    0 ... uncorrected arc length
    + ... longer /arc

    Example: SynchroPulse, duty cycle (high) = 25%
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Process parameters for Process Mix

    For mixing processes, the following process parameters can be set under Process Mix:

    Wire speed vD *
    Wire speed

    1.0 - 25.0 m/min / 40 - 985 ipm

    The wire speed value is taken from the welding parameters or can be specified and changed in the Process Mix parameters.

    Arc length correction

    -10.0 - +10.0

    The arc length correction value is taken from the welding parameters or can be specified and changed in the Process Mix parameters.

    Pulse correction
    For changing the pulse energy in the pulsed arc process phase

    -10.0 - +10.0

    The pulse/dynamic correction value is taken from the welding parameters or can be specified and changed in the Process Mix parameters.

    Upper power time correction (3) *
    To set the duration of the hot process phase in a mixed process

    -10.0 - +10.0
    Factory setting: 0

    Upper and lower power time correction is used to define the relationship between the hot and cold process phases.

    If the lower power time correction is increased, the process frequency reduces and the PMC process phase becomes longer.

    If the lower power time correction is reduced, the process frequency increases and the PMC process phase becomes shorter.

    Lower power time correction (2) *
    To set the duration of the cold process phase in a mixed process

    -10.0 - +10.0 / 1 - 100 CMT cycles (for CMT mix characteristics)
    Factory setting: 0

    Upper and lower power time correction is used to define the relationship between the hot and cold process phases.

    If the lower power time correction is increased, the process frequency reduces and the LSC process phase becomes longer or, in the case of CMT mix, the CMT process phase becomes longer.

    If the lower power time correction is reduces, the process frequency increases and the LSC process phase becomes shorter or, in the case of CMT mix, the CMT process phase becomes shorter.

    Lower power correction (1) *
    To set the energy input in the cold process phase in a mixed process

    -10.0 - +10.0
    Factory setting: 0

    If the lower power correction is increased, this results in a higher wire speed and therefore a higher energy yield in the cold LSC process phase or the cold CMT process phase.


    * Representation of the parameters in the following diagrams

    Mixed process between PMC and LSC welding process. A cold LSC process phase follows a hot PMC process phase as part of a cycle.
    Mixed process between PMC and wire movement reversal using a PushPull drive unit. A cold low power phase with calibration movement follows a hot PMC process phase.
    Mixed process between CMT and PMC welding process. Cold CMT process phases follow hot PMC process phases.
    (1)
    Lower power correction
    (2)
    Lower power time correction
    (3)
    Upper power time correction
    vD
    Wire speed
    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Process parameters for additive welding process control

    Wire speed
    Wire feed speed

    1.0 – 30.0 m/min / 40 – 1181 ipm

    The wire speed value is taken from the welding parameters or can be specified and changed in the parameters for additive welding.

    Arc length correction

    -10.0 to +10.0

    The wire speed value is taken from the welding parameters or can be specified and changed in the parameters for additive welding.

    Power correction
    to adjust the welding power at a constant wire speed to ensure a constant weld seam structure

    -10.0 - +10.0
    Factory setting: 0

    Arc-on time stabilizer

    on / 0.1 - 10.0 m/min / off
    Factory setting: on

    Arc-on time stabilizer dynamics

    auto / 10.0 - 0.0
    Factory setting: auto

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Process parameters for CMT Cycle Step

    CMT Cycle Step
    To activate / deactivate the function CMT Cycle Step

    On/Off

    Wire feed
    Wire speed, defines the deposition rate in the welding process phase and thus the size of the welding spot;

    Setting range: in m/min (ipm), depending on the welding characteristic

    The value for the wire speed is applied; it can also be specified or changed in the CMT Cycle Step parameters.

    Cycles (spot size)
    To set the number of CMT cycles (welding droplets) for a spot;
    The number of CMT cycles and the set wire speed define the size of the welding spot.

    1 - 2000

    Interval pause time
    To set the time between the individual welding spots

    0.01 - 2.00 s

    The higher the value for the interval pause time, the cooler the welding process (coarser rippling).

    Interval cycles
    To set the number of CMT cycle repetitions incl. pause until the end of welding

    Continuous / 1 - 2000

    Continuous
    The repetitions are continued continuously; end of welding e.g., via "Arc Off"

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Process parameters for AC setup

    AC power balance
    for adjusting the ratio of positive to negative cycle time in a process phase

    -10.0 - +10.0
    Factory setting: 0.0

    The AC power balance can be adjusted for PMC-AC characteristics and for CMT-AC characteristics for aluminum.

    AC cycles negative
    for setting the number of negative process cycles

    Negative process phases introduce less heat into the component.

    constant / auto / 1 - 100
    Factory setting: 10

    Negative process cycles can only be set for CMT-AC processes.

    AC cycles positive
    for setting the number of positive process cycles

    Positive process phases introduce more heat into the component.

    constant / auto / 1 - 100
    Factory setting: 10

    Positive process cycles can only be set for CMT-AC processes.

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Process parameters for spot welding

    Spot welding time 

    0.1 - 10.0  s
    Factory setting: 1.0 s

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Process parameters for interval

    Stitch
    To activate/deactivate stitch welding

    off/on
    Factory setting: off

    Wirefeeder

    0.0 - max. m/min (depending on the wirefeeder used)

    Stitch welding time

    0.01 – 9.9 s
    Factory setting: 0.3 s

    Stitch pause time

    off / 0.01 – 9.9 s
    Factory setting: 0.3 s

    Stitch cycles

    constant / 1 – 99
    Factory setting: constant

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    Process parameters for manual setup

    Ignition current
    To set the ignition current for MIG/MAG standard manual welding

    100 - 550 A (TPS 320i, TPS 320i C)
    100 - 600 A (TPS 400i)
    100 - 650 A (TPS 500i, TPS 600i)
    Factory setting: 500 A

    Wire retraction
    To set the wire retraction value (= combined value from wire retraction and a time) during MIG/MAG standard manual welding
    The wire retraction depends on the equipment on the welding torch.

    0.0 – 10.0
    Factory setting: 0.0

    Characteristic curve slope

    auto / U constant / 1000 – 8 A/V
    Factory setting: auto

    1. Multiprocess PRO - MIG/MAG
    2. MIG/MAG process parameters

    R/L alignment

    Align the welding circuit resistance (R) and inductance (L) if one of the following welding system components is changed:

    • Torch hosepacks
    • Interconnecting hosepacks
    • Return lead cables, welding power-leads
    • Wirefeeders
    • Welding torches, electrode holders
    • PushPull units

    Prerequisites for R/L alignment:

    The welding system must be complete: closed welding circuit with welding torch and torch hosepack, wirefeeders, grounding cable, interconnecting hosepacks.

    Perform R/L alignment:

    1Select Process parameters / Common / R/L-check / alignment

    The actual values for welding circuit inductance and welding circuit resistance are displayed.

    2Select "Next" / press selection dial / press torch trigger

    The second step of the R/L alignment wizard is displayed.

    3Follow the on-screen instructions

    IMPORTANT! Contact between the earthing clamp and the workpiece must be made on a cleaned workpiece surface.
    4Select "Next" / press selection dial / press torch trigger

    The third step of the R/L alignment wizard is displayed.

    5Follow the on-screen instructions
    6Select "Next" / press selection dial / press torch trigger

    The fourth step of the R/L alignment wizard is displayed.

    7Follow the on-screen instructions
    8Press torch trigger / select "Next" / press selection dial

    The actual values are displayed when the measurement is complete.

    9Select "End" / press selection dial

    Alternatively, the R/L alignment can also be performed via a JobMaster welding torch.

    Job Mode

    EasyJob mode

    General

    When EasyJob mode is activated, the display shows 5 additional buttons that enable fast saving of up to 5 operating points.
    The current welding-relevant settings are saved.

    If there is a robot interface in the welding system, the EasyJob buttons are not displayed, the EasyJob mode is grayed out and cannot be activated.

    1. Job Mode

    EasyJob mode

    General

    When EasyJob mode is activated, the display shows 5 additional buttons that enable fast saving of up to 5 operating points.
    The current welding-relevant settings are saved.

    If there is a robot interface in the welding system, the EasyJob buttons are not displayed, the EasyJob mode is grayed out and cannot be activated.

    1. Job Mode
    2. EasyJob mode

    General

    When EasyJob mode is activated, the display shows 5 additional buttons that enable fast saving of up to 5 operating points.
    The current welding-relevant settings are saved.

    If there is a robot interface in the welding system, the EasyJob buttons are not displayed, the EasyJob mode is grayed out and cannot be activated.

    1. Job Mode
    2. EasyJob mode

    Activating EasyJob mode

    1Select "Defaults"
    2Select "View"
    3Select "EasyJobs"

    The overview for activating/deactivating EasyJob mode is displayed.

    4Select "EasyJobs On"
    5Select "OK"

    EasyJob mode is activated, the defaults are displayed.

    6Select "Welding"

    The five EasyJob buttons are displayed with the welding parameters.

    1. Job Mode
    2. EasyJob mode

    Storing EasyJob operating points

    NOTE!

    The EasyJobs are stored under job numbers 1 - 5 and can also be retrieved via job mode.

    Storing an EasyJob overwrites a job stored under the same job number!

    1Touch one of the EasyJob buttons for approx. 3 seconds to store the current welding settings

    The button initially changes in size and color. After approx. 3 seconds, the button changes color again.
    The settings have now been stored.

    The most recently stored settings are enabled. An active EasyJob is displayed by a check mark on the EasyJob button.

    Unused EasyJob buttons are shown in dark gray.

    Example:
    EasyJobs 1 and 4 are occupied;
    EasyJobs 2, 3 and 5 are not occupied;
    EasyJob 1 is active
    1. Job Mode
    2. EasyJob mode

    Retrieving EasyJob operating points

    1To retrieve a stored EasyJob operating point, briefly touch the corresponding EasyJob button (< 3 seconds)

    The button briefly changes in size and color and is then displayed with a check mark:

    If no check mark is displayed after touching an EasyJob button, an operating point is not stored under this button.

    1. Job Mode
    2. EasyJob mode

    Deleting EasyJob operating points

    1To delete an EasyJob operating point, touch the corresponding EasyJob button for approx. 5 seconds

    The button

    • initially changes in size and color;
    • color changes again after approx. 3 seconds
      The stored operating point is overwritten with the current settings.
    • is highlighted in red after a total of approx. 5 seconds (= delete).

    The EasyJob operating point has been deleted.

    1. Job Mode
    2. EasyJob mode

    Loading more EasyJobs

    With this function, any saved job can be loaded as an EasyJob in the welding menu without switching to Job Mode.

    1Select Defaults / View / EasyJobs

    The overview for activating/deactivating EasyJob mode is displayed.

    2"Select "Load more EasyJobs"
    3Select "OK"

    Advanced EasyJob mode is activated, the defaults are displayed.

    4Select "Welding"

    In the welding parameters, the "Load job" button is also displayed in the right menu bar.

    5Select "Load Job"

    The list of stored jobs is displayed.

    6Use the dial to select the desired job
    7Select "Load" or press the dial

    The job is loaded in the welding menu, the welding machine is not in Job Mode.

    1. Job Mode

    Job Mode

    General

    Up to 1000 jobs can be stored and reproduced on the welding machine.
    This eliminates the need to manually document the welding parameters.
    Job mode thereby increases the quality of automated and manual applications.

    Jobs can only be saved during welding mode. In addition to the current welding settings, the process parameters and certain machine defaults are also taken into account when saving jobs.

    1. Job Mode
    2. Job Mode

    General

    Up to 1000 jobs can be stored and reproduced on the welding machine.
    This eliminates the need to manually document the welding parameters.
    Job mode thereby increases the quality of automated and manual applications.

    Jobs can only be saved during welding mode. In addition to the current welding settings, the process parameters and certain machine defaults are also taken into account when saving jobs.

    1. Job Mode
    2. Job Mode

    Saving settings as a job

    1Set the parameters to be saved as a job:
    • Welding parameters
    • Welding process
    • Process parameters
    • Machine defaults, if applicable
    2Select "Save as Job"

    The list of jobs is displayed.

    To overwrite an existing job, select the job by turning and pressing the selection dial (or select "Next page").
    After a prompt appears, the selected job can be overwritten.

    For a new job, select "Create a new Job"

    3Press the selection dial/select "Next page"

    The next free job number is displayed.

    4Turn the selection dial and select the desired storage location
    5Press the selection dial/select "Next page"

    The keyboard is displayed.

    6Enter a job name
    7Select "OK" and confirm the job name/press the selection dial

    The name is applied and confirmation that the job has been saved is displayed.

    8Select "Exit" to exit/press the selection dial
    1. Job Mode
    2. Job Mode

    Welding job - retrieving jobs

    NOTE!

    Before retrieving a job, ensure that the welding system is set up and installed according to the job in question.

    1Select "Welding process"
    2Select "Process"
    3Select "JOB"

    Alternatively, the welding process can also be selected via the status bar (compare with the selection method described from page (→)).

    Job mode is activated.
    "Welding job" and the data for the last job retrieved are displayed.

    4Select "Welding job"
    5Turn the selection dial and select "Job number" (white background)
    6Press the selection dial to select the desired job (blue background)
    7Turn the selection dial and select the desired job number (blue background)
    The name of the selected job is displayed above the actual value display.
    8Press the selection dial and accept the selected job number (white background)
    9Initiate welding process

    IMPORTANT! In job mode, only the "Job number" welding parameter can be changed; the remaining welding parameters can only be viewed.

    1. Job Mode
    2. Job Mode

    Optimizing a job

    1Select "Process parameters"
    2Select "JOB"
    3Select "Optimize Job"

    The overview of the last optimized job is displayed.

    4Turn the selection dial and select either the job or the parameters of the job to be modified

    You can also select between job and job parameters by touching the "Job number/Job parameter" button.
    Select a job:
    • Press the selection dial

      The job number is highlighted in blue and can now be changed.
    • Turn the selection dial to select the job to be changed
    • Press the selection dial to change the job
    Select a job parameter:
    • Turn the selection dial and select the parameter to be changed
    • Press the selection dial

      The value of the parameter is highlighted in blue and can now be changed.
    • Turn the selection dial; the change of value is applied immediately
    • Press the selection dial to select other parameters
    5Select "Exit"
    1. Job Mode
    2. Job Mode

    Renaming a job

    1Select "Save as Job"
    (also works in job mode)

    The list of jobs is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the job to be renamed
    3Select "Rename Job"

    The keyboard is displayed.

    4Use the keyboard to change the job name
    5Select "OK" and confirm the changed job name/press the selection dial

    The job name has been changed and the list of jobs is displayed.

    6Select "Cancel" to exit

    NOTE!

    As an alternative to the procedure described above, the job can also be renamed in the process parameters:

    Process parameters / Job / Optimize job / Rename job

    1. Job Mode
    2. Job Mode

    Deleting a job

    1Select "Save as Job"
    (also works in job mode)

    The list of jobs is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the job to be deleted
    3Select "Delete Job"

    The prompt to delete the job is displayed.

    4Select "Yes" to delete the selected job

    The job has been deleted and the list of jobs is displayed.

    5Select "Cancel" to exit

    NOTE!

    As an alternative to the procedure described above, the job can also be deleted in the process parameters:

    Process parameters / Job / Optimize job / Delete job

    1. Job Mode
    2. Job Mode

    Loading a job

    Use the Load Job function to load the data for a stored job or EasyJob into the Welding area. The corresponding data for the job is displayed in the welding parameters and can be welded, modified or saved as a new job or EasyJob.

    1Select "Save as Job"
    (also works in job mode)

    The list of jobs is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the job to be loaded
    3Select "Load Job"

    The Load Job information is displayed.

    4Select "Yes"

    The data for the selected job is loaded in the Welding area.

    The data for the loaded job can now be welded (no job mode), modified or saved as a new job or EasyJob.

    1. Job Mode
    2. Job Mode

    Job Mode with WF 25i Dual

    If a WF 25i Dual dual-head wirefeeder is in the welding system, the following parameters are also available:

    • Welding process line
      Process parameters / Job / Optimize job / Welding process parameters
    • Ignore welding process line
      Process parameters / Job / Pre-settings for "Save as job" / Dual-head wirefeeder

    Welding process line
    The parameter assigns a welding process line to the job:

    1
    The job can only be welded on welding process line 1.

    2
    The job can only be welded on welding process line 2.

    ignore
    The job can be used by both welding process lines.
    The welding process line is selected using the torch trigger, status bar, keys on the WF Dual or remote control.

    Selecting a job automatically activates the associated welding process line.
    The job can be selected from both welding process lines.

    For jobs created on a firmware version < 4.0.0, the parameter is automatically set to "ignore" during a firmware update.

    If another robot dual-head option is in the system instead of the WF Dual in automated applications, the parameter is not available.
    The welding process line is selected via the robot interface.

    Ignore welding process line
    The parameter specifies which default value is used for the weld process line when creating a job.

    No
    The welding process line is taken from the currently active welding process line when a job is created (can be changed).

    Yes
    The welding process line is initially filled with "ignore" when a job is created (can be changed).

    The parameter is set to "No" by default; when a job is created, the currently active welding process line is always adopted.
    The parameter is not displayed for automated welding systems and has no effect.

    NOTE!

    A JobMaster welding torch is recommended for Job Mode with a WF 25i Dual.

    1. Job Mode

    Job process parameters

    JOB process parameters

    Process parameters for Components and Monitoring see page (→).

    1. Job Mode
    2. Job process parameters

    JOB process parameters

    Process parameters for Components and Monitoring see page (→).

    1. Job Mode
    2. Job process parameters

    Process parameters for "Optimize Job"

    The following process parameters can be set for "Optimize Job":

    Working parameters

    Starting current
    [% of main current]

    see page (→)

    UpSlope
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Main current
    [A]

    see page (→)

    Lowering current
    for 4-step mode
    [% of main current]

    see page (→)

    DownSlope
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Final current
    [% of main current]

    see page (→)

    AC Balance
    iWave AC/DC welding machines only
    [%]

    see page (→)

    Electrode diameter
    [mm]

    see page (→)

    Welding process settings

    Polarity
    [DC-/AC]

    see page (→)

    TIG welding torch mode
    [2-step mode/4-step mode/spot welding]

    see page (→)

    TIG pulse settings

    Tacking
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Pulse frequency
    [Hz]

    see page (→)

    Base current
    [% of main current]

    see page (→)

    Duty cycle
    [%]

    see page (→)

    Pulse waveform
    [rectangle/triangle/sine]

    see page (→)

    Base current waveform
    [rectangle/triangle/sine]

    see page (→)

    TIG AC Settings
    (iWave AC/DC welding machines only)

    AC frequency
    [Hz]

    see page (→)

    AC current offset
    [%]

    see page (→)

    Positive half-wave waveform
    [rectangle/triangle/sine]

    see page (→)

    Negative half-wave waveform
    [rectangle/triangle/sine]

    see page (→)

    Wire speed settings

    TIG wire correction

    -10 - 10
    Factory setting: 0

    Wire speed 1
    [m/min]

    see page (→)

    Wire speed 2
    [%]

    see page (→)

    Start-up delay wire
    [s]

    see page (→)

    End delay wire
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Wire retraction end
    [mm]

    see page (→)

    Wire position Start
    [mm]

    see page (→)

    Feeder inching speed
    [m/min]

    see page (→)

    Ignition & operating mode settings

    HF ignition
    [on/off/Touch-HF/external]

    see page (→)

    HF ignition delay
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Reversed polarity ignition
    [off/on]

    see page (→)

    Arc monitoring

    Ignition timeout
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Arc break filter time
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Arc break watchdog
    [ignore/error]

    see page (→)

    Lowering current for 4-step mode
    [% of main current]

    see page (→)

    DownSlope
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Final current
    [% of main current]

    see page (→)

    AC Balance
    iWave AC/DC welding machines only
    [%]

    see page (→)

    Electrode diameter
    [mm]

    see page (→)

    Operating mode defaults

    Arc break voltage
    [V]

    see page (→)

    Comfort stop sensitivity
    [V]

    see page (→)

    TIG - General settings

    Starting current time
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Final current time
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Lowering current Slope 1
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Lowering current Slope2
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Spot welding time
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Gas pre-flow
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Gas post-flow
    [s]

    see page (→)

    TIG job correction limits

    Upper main current limit
    [%]

    0 - 50%
    Factory setting: 0%

    Lower main current limit
    [%]

    -50 - 0%
    Factory setting: 0%

    Job slope
    Defines the time between the currently selected job and the next job
    [s]

    0.0 - 10.0 s
    Factory setting: 0 s

    CycleTIG

    CycleTIG activated

    see page (→)

    Interval time
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Interval pause time
    [s]

    see page (→)

    Stitch cycles

    see page (→)

    Base current
    [A]

    see page (→)

    Limit Monitoring

    Voltage setpoint
    [V]

    0.0 - 100.0 V
    Factory setting: 100.0 V

    Lower voltage limit
    [V]

    -10.0 - 0.0 V
    Factory setting: -1.0 V

    Upper voltage limit
    [V]

    0.0 - 10.0 V
    Factory setting: 1.0 V

    Maximum time of voltage deviation
    [s]

    off / 0.1 - 10.0 s
    Factory setting: off

    Current setpoint
    [A]

    0.0 - 1000.0 A
    Factory setting: -

    Lower current limit
    [A]

    -100 - 0 A
    Factory setting: - 10 A

    Upper current limit
    [A]

    0 - 100 A
    Factory setting: 10 A

    Maximum time for current deviation
    [s]

    off / 0.1 - 10.0 s
    Factory setting: off

    Wire speed setpoint
    [m/min]

    see page (→)

    Lower wire speed limit
    [m/min]

    -10.0 - 0.0 m/min
    Factory setting: -1.0 m/min

    Upper wire speed limit
    [m/min]

    0.0 - 10.0 m/min
    Factory setting: 1.0 m/min

    Maximum time of wire feed deviation
    [s]

    off / 0.1 - 10.0 s
    Factory setting: off

    Welding time setpoint
    [s]

    0.0 - 999.9 s
    Factory setting: 5.0 s

    Lower welding time limit
    [s]

    -50.0 - 0.0 s
    Factory setting: -1.0 s

    Upper welding time limit
    [A]

    0.0 - 50.0 s
    Factory setting: 1.0 s

    Monitor welding time

    off/on
    Factory setting: off

    Energy setpoint
    [kJ]

    0.0 - max. kJ
    Factory setting: 1.0 kJ

    Lower energy limit
    [kJ]

    -100.0 - 0.0 kJ
    Factory setting: 0.0 kJ

    Upper energy limit
    [kJ]

    0.0 - 100.0 kJ
    Factory setting: 1.0 kJ

    Monitor energy

    off/on
    Factory setting: off

    Reaction if exceeded

    ignore/warning/error
    Factory setting: ignore

    1. Job Mode
    2. Job process parameters

    Setting correction limits for a job

    For each job, individual correction limits can be set for welding power and arc length.
    If correction limits are set for a job, the welding power and arc length of the job can be corrected within the specified limits.

    1Select "Process parameters"
    2Select "JOB"
    3Select "Correction limits"

    An overview of job correction limits for the most recently accessed job is displayed.

    4Turn the selection dial and select either the job or the limits of the job to be modified

    You can also select between job and job limits by touching the "Job number/Job parameter" button.
    Select a job:
    • Press the selection dial

      The job number is highlighted in blue and can now be changed.
    • Turn the selection dial to select the job to be changed
    • Press the selection dial to change the job
    Select job limits:
    • Turn the selection dial and select the desired limit group
    • Press the selection dial

      The selected limit group is opened.
    • Turn the selection dial and select the upper or lower limit
    • Press the selection dial

      The value of the limit parameter is highlighted in blue and can now be changed.
    • Turn the selection dial; the change of value is applied immediately
    • Press the selection dial to select other limit parameters
    5Select "Exit"
    1. Job Mode
    2. Job process parameters

    Pre-settings for "Save as Job"

    Under "Pre-settings for "Save as Job", you can set default values that are applied to each new job you create.

    1Select "Process parameters"
    2Select "JOB"
    3Select "Pre-settings for "Save as Job"
    4Confirm the displayed information

    The pre-settings for saving new jobs are displayed.

    5Turn the selection dial and select the desired parameter
    6Press the selection dial
    7Turn the selection dial and adjust the value
    8Press the selection dial
    9Select "Exit"

    Process parameters

    Overview

    Overview

    Process parameters / Common TIG/MMA/CEL ... see page (→)

    Process parameters / Common MIG/MAG ... see page (→)

    Process parameters / Components & Monitoring ... see page (→)

    Process parameters / JOB ... see page (→)

    1. Process parameters

    Overview

    Overview

    Process parameters / Common TIG/MMA/CEL ... see page (→)

    Process parameters / Common MIG/MAG ... see page (→)

    Process parameters / Components & Monitoring ... see page (→)

    Process parameters / JOB ... see page (→)

    1. Process parameters
    2. Overview

    Overview

    Process parameters / Common TIG/MMA/CEL ... see page (→)

    Process parameters / Common MIG/MAG ... see page (→)

    Process parameters / Components & Monitoring ... see page (→)

    Process parameters / JOB ... see page (→)

    1. Process parameters

    Process parameters - Components & monitoring

    Process parameters - Components & Monitoring

    NOTE!

    Depending on the device type, equipment, and available WeldingPackages, the display and the sequence of the process parameters may vary.

    1. Process parameters
    2. Process parameters - Components & monitoring

    Process parameters - Components & Monitoring

    NOTE!

    Depending on the device type, equipment, and available WeldingPackages, the display and the sequence of the process parameters may vary.

    1. Process parameters
    2. Process parameters - Components & monitoring

    Process parameters for components

    Cooling unit

    Cooling unit operating mode
    For controlling a cooling unit

    eco / auto / on / off
    Factory setting: auto

    auto
    When welding starts, the cooling unit starts to operate (fan and coolant pump running).
    After the end of welding, the cooling unit continues to operate for 2 minutes. When the 2 minutes have elapsed, the cooling unit also switches off.

    on
    Continuous operation
    As soon as the welding machine is switched on, the cooling unit starts to operate (fan and coolant pump running continuously)

    off
    No operation, even when welding starts

    eco
    The coolant pump starts to operate when welding starts.
    The fan starts to operate from a coolant return temperature of 40 °C (104 °F) (only in conjunction with the flow temperature sensor option).

    When filling the torch hosepack, the coolant pump will run for 10 seconds as soon as the flow reaches > 0.7 l/min.

    After the end of welding, the cooling unit continues to operate for at least 15 seconds. As soon as the coolant return temperature reaches < 40 °C the cooling unit shuts down.
    The maximum after-run time is 2 minutes.

    Flow sensor filter time
    (only if the flow temperature sensor option is available on the cooling unit)
    To set the time from when the flow sensor is triggered until a warning message is output

    5 - 25 s
    Factory setting: 10 s

    Cooler flow warning limit
    (only if the flow temperature sensor option is available on the cooling unit)
    If the parameter is activated, a warning is generated when the value entered is undershot.

    off / 0.75 / 0.8 / 0.85 / 0.9 / 0.95
    Factory setting: off

    Wirefeeder

    Feeder inching speed
    To set the wire speed at which the wire electrode or welding wire is fed into the torch hosepack

    For example: 2 - 25 m/min / 20 - 3935 ipm
    (depending on wire speed)
    Factory setting: 10 m/min

    NOTE!

    The feeder inching speed can also be set in the window that opens when the wire threading key is pressed:

    Press the wire threading key

    Press and turn the dial to change the feeder inching speed value

    Select "Close" or press the dial to accept the value

    Welding machine

    Ignition timeout
    Length of wire that is fed before the safety cut-out trips

    off / 5 - 100 mm (0.2 - 3.94 in.)
    Factory setting: off

    NOTE!

    The Ignition timeout process parameter is a safety function.

    At high wire speeds in particular, the length of wire fed until the safety cut-out trips can deviate from the set wire length.

    How it works:
    If the torch trigger is pressed, the gas pre-flow begins immediately. Wirefeeding and the ignition process then begin. If there is no current flow within the specified fed wire length, the system switches off automatically.
    Press the torch trigger again for a further attempt.

    Sense line
    To enable/disable the sense line function

    off / on
    Factory setting: on

    The sense line is additional hardware for direct voltage measurement on the workpiece. The function is used for correct determination of the actual value when several welding processes are welding simultaneously on one component and there is a risk of coupled interference voltages due to unfavorable hosepack routing or common grounding cables.

    Robot settings

    TouchSensing sensitivity
    For setting the sensitivity during TouchSensing in connection with the OPT/i WF gas nozzle position search option installed in the wirefeeder for different component surfaces and external interference

    Setting the TouchSensing sensitivity has no effect on the OPT/i Touch Sense Adv option.

    TouchSensing = Locating the seam position by means of applied sensor voltage during automated welding
    TouchSensing is performed via the gas nozzle or the wire electrode.

    TouchSensing by means of gas nozzle only works if:

    • the OPT/i WF gas nozzle position search option is installed in the robot wirefeeder,
      or
    • the OPT/i Touch Sense Adv. option is installed in the robot wirefeeder or welding machine.
    • With existing robot interface.

    0 - 10
    Factory setting: 1

    0
    for bare surfaces, long and dead short circuit, robust and immune to interference

    10
    for scaled surfaces, high measurement-related interference sensitivity
    Not suitable for welding with multiple welding machines on one component!

    Insulated surfaces cannot be detected.

    Procedure for determining TouchSensing sensitivity:

    • Start with the factory-set value 1
    • If no trigger signal is generated, increase TouchSensing sensitivity

    IMPORTANT! A higher TouchSensing sensitivity also increases the susceptibility to interference!

    Edge detection "WireSense"
    To activate / set edge detection using WireSense (option)

    off / 0.5 - 20.0 mm
    Factory setting: off

    "WireSense" edge detection only works

    • On automated applications
    • If the OPT/i WireSense is present on the welding machine (software enable)
    • In combination with the CMT system components WF 60i Robacta Drive CMT, SB 500i R with wire buffer or SB 60i R and WFi Reel.

    WireSense is usually activated via a robot controller. As soon as a value > 0.5 mm is specified by the robot controller, the value set manually on the welding machine is overwritten.

    If the Ignition timeout parameter is activated, this also applies to WireSense.

    For higher-level robot controllers with a small signal range (e.g., linear trolleys), WireSense can be set manually on the welding machine.

    Example Economy-Image:

    • Start / Stop comes from the controller.
    • The edge height is specified on the welding machine.
    1. Process parameters
    2. Process parameters - Components & monitoring

    Draining/filling the torch hosepack

    Requirements for draining/filling the torch hosepack:

    • The OPT/i Torch Deflate option must be available on the cooling unit
    • Cooling unit operating mode = eco or auto
    • The welding machine must not be in welding mode.
    • The torch hosepack must not be filled at this time.
    • The torch body must be assembled.
    • The torch hosepack must be correctly connected.

    NOTE!

    When draining long hosepacks > 4 m, a fully filled coolant tank can overflow—risk of slipping!

    Observe the Operating Instructions and safety instructions for the cooling unit!

    Draining the torch hosepack

    1Select Process parameters / Components / Drain/fill torch hosepack
    2Follow the on-screen instructions
    3Select "Start" and follow the on-screen instructions

    or
    * Press the intermediate lowering button to stop the process
    3Press and hold the LED button on the welding torch
    4Press the Down (-) button and hold for 2 seconds
    5Follow the on-screen instructions

    If the coolant temperature is too high, a cooling phase is executed. During the cooling phase, the LED on the welding torch flashes approx. 2 x per second.

    The draining process is then started. The draining process takes approx. 30 seconds. During the draining process, the LED on the welding torch flashes approx. 1 x per second

    A confirmation is displayed after the draining process has been completed.
    The torch body can now be changed.
    If the torch hosepack is to be changed, the welding machine must be switched off first.

    IMPORTANT! Welding is not possible if the torch hosepack has been drained.

    Filling the torch hosepack

    1Press the gas-test button and follow the on-screen instructions
    or
    1Press and hold the LED button on the welding torch
    2Press the Down (-) button and hold for 2 seconds
    3Follow the on-screen instructions

    A confirmation is displayed after the filling process has been successfully completed.

    4Complete filling process by pressing OK
    1. Process parameters
    2. Process parameters - Components & monitoring

    System adjustment

    If two motors are being used in a welding system, they must be calibrated to maintain process stability.

    For welding systems with PushPull units or unreeling wirefeeders, a system adjustment must be carried out whenever the wirefeeders are installed or replaced.

    A corresponding message is displayed.

    1Select "OK" and start the system adjustment

    The System adjustment wizard is started.

    2Follow the on-screen instructions

    The system adjustment can also be started manually.

    Perform system adjustment:

    1Select Process parameters / Components & Monitoring / System adjust

    If a system adjustment is required, the System adjustment wizard is started. The first step of the System adjustment wizard is displayed:

    2Follow the on-screen instructions
    3To call up each step of the System adjustment wizard in sequence, select "Next page" / press the selection dial

    A confirmation message is displayed once the system adjustment has finished.

    4To exit the System adjustment wizard, select "Exit" / press the selection dial
    1. Process parameters
    2. Process parameters - Components & monitoring

    Arc break watchdog

    1Select Process parameters / Components & Monitoring / Arc break watchdog settings

    The "Arc break watchdog" overview is displayed.

    2Turn the dial and select the desired parameter
    3Press the dial (blue background)
    4Turn the dial and change the value of the parameter (blue background)

    Arc break reaction = ignorieren (deactivated):
    The welding machine remains in operation and no error message is displayed.

    Arc break reaction = Fehler (activated):
    If the arc breaks and there is no current flow within a set arc break time period, the system switches off automatically and an error message is displayed.

    Factory setting = ignorieren

    Arc break time = 0 - 2.00 s
    If the set time period is exceeded, an error is displayed.

    Factory setting = 0.2 s
    5Select "OK" to activate the arc break watchdog
    1. Process parameters
    2. Process parameters - Components & monitoring

    Wire stick contact tip

    1Select Process parameters / Components & Monitoring / Wire stick contact tip

    The "Wire stick contact tip - Setup menu" is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the desired parameter
    3Press the selection dial (blue background)
    4Turn the selection dial and change the value of the parameter (blue background)

    Wire stick on contact tip = ignore:
    Monitoring of a wire stick on the contact tip is deactivated.

    Wire stick on contact tip = Fehler (activated):
    If the wire is sticking to the contact tip, the welding process is interrupted.

    IMPORTANT! Monitoring is only possible with dip transfer arc processes.

    Factory setting = ignorieren

    Filter time = 0.5 - 5.0 s
    Maximum period without arc short circuit until the welding process is interrupted.

    Factory setting = 0.5 s
    5Select "OK" to confirm the settings
    1. Process parameters
    2. Process parameters - Components & monitoring

    Wire stick workpiece

    1Select Process parameters / Components & Monitoring / Wire stick work piece

    The "Wire stick workpiece - Setup menu" is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the desired parameter
    3Press the selection dial (blue background)
    4Turn the selection dial and change the value of the parameter (blue background)

    Wire stick on workpiece = ignorieren:
    Monitoring of a wire stick on the workpiece is deactivated.

    Wire stick on workpiece = Fehler (activated):
    If the wire is sticking to the workpiece, the welding process is interrupted.

    Factory setting = ignorieren
    5Select "OK" to confirm the settings
    1. Process parameters
    2. Process parameters - Components & monitoring

    Welding circuit coupling

    This function can be used to measure the inductances present in the welding circuit.
    Inductances can lead to welding problems, for example when several systems weld on one component.

    With the help of inductance measurement and appropriate cable management, welding problems can be promptly prevented when commissioning a welding system.

    Selecting the "Welding circuit coupling" button starts a corresponding wizard.

    1To measure the inductances in the welding circuit, follow the instructions provided by the Wizard.

    Measurement results:

    Result

    Rcoupling
    (common ground)

    Kcoupling
    (inductive coupling)

    Very good

    0 mOhm

    0%

    Good

    1 - 2.5 mOhm

    2 - 15%

    On average

    3 - 15 mOhm

    16 - 30%

    Poor

    16 - 100 mOhm

    31 - 100%

    The measurement results are stored in the logbook.

    Details on the welding circuit coupling are described in the Operating Instructions "Cable Management Guide" - 42,0426,0420,xx.
    The Operating Instructions are available as an HTML file under the following link:

    https://manuals.fronius.com/html/4204260420

    1. Process parameters
    2. Process parameters - Components & monitoring

    Wire end monitoring

    1Select Process parameters / Components & Monitoring / Wire end monitoring

    The "Wire end monitoring setup menu" overview is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the desired parameter depending on the existing wire end monitoring:
    (1)
    Wire end reaction for
    OPT/i WF R WE ring sensor
    4,100,878,CK
    (2)
    Wire end reaction for
    OPT/i WF R WE drum
    4,100,879,CK
    (3)
    Wire end reaction for
    OPT/i WF R wire end
    4,100,869,CK
    3Press the selection dial (blue background)
    4Turn the selection dial and change the value of the parameter (blue background)

    Reaction = Error:
    Wire end error, the welding process is interrupted immediately. The error is shown on the display.

    Reaction = After seam end:
    The wire end error is shown on the display once the current welding process is complete.

    Reaction = Ignore (deactivated):
    No reaction on wire end detection

    Factory setting = Error
    5Select "OK" to confirm the settings
    1. Process parameters
    2. Process parameters - Components & monitoring

    Gas monitoring

    The gas monitoring parameters are only available if the OPT/i gas flow sensor option is present on the wirefeeder or SplitBox.

    A lower gas flow limit can be defined for gas monitoring. If the gas flow drops below a specified level for a defined time, an error message is immediately displayed and the welding process stops.

    1Select Process parameters / Components & Monitoring / Gas monitoring

    The "Gas monitoring" overview is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the desired parameter:

    Lower gas flow limit
    Setting range: 0.5 - 30.0 l/min
    Factory setting: 7.0 l/min

    Maximum time of gas deviation
    Setting range: off / 0.1 - 10.0 s
    Factory setting: 2.0 s

    Sensor gas factor
    Setting range: auto / 0.90 - 20.00

    Overview of important gas factors:
    1.00 - C1 (CO2)
    1.52 - M21 ArC-18
    1.69 - M12 ArC-2.5
    1.72 - I1 (Argon)
    11.8 - I2 (Helium)

    Factory setting: auto

    NOTE!

    An incorrectly set gas factor can have a massive influence on the shielding gas quantity and thus on the welding result.

    Under the "auto" setting, all standard gases from the Fronius welding database are taken into account.

    Manual adjustment of the gas factor is only recommended for special gases and only after a discussion with Fronius.

    3Press the selection dial (blue background)
    4Turn the dial and change the value of the parameter (blue background)
    5Select "OK" to confirm the settings
    1. Process parameters
    2. Process parameters - Components & monitoring

    Motor force monitoring

    1Select Process parameters / Components & Monitoring / Motor force monitoring

    The "Motor force monitoring" overview is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the desired parameter:

    Wirefeed force monitoring

    Setting range:
    Ignore (no reaction)
    Warning (a warning is displayed)
    Error (welding process is interrupted, an error message is displayed)
    Factory setting: Ignore

    Maximum force
    Setting range: 0 - 999 N
    Factory setting: 0 N

    Maximum time of force deviation
    Setting range: 0.1 - 10.0 s
    Factory setting: 3 s
    3Press the selection dial (blue background)
    4Turn the dial and change the value of the parameter (blue background)
    5Select "OK" to confirm the settings
    1. Process parameters
    2. Process parameters - Components & monitoring

    Wire buffer monitoring

    The parameters for wire buffer monitoring are available if there is a wire buffer in the welding system.

    1Select Process parameters / Components & Monitoring / Wire buffer monitoringIt is possible to set the reaction in case of an empty wire buffer:Error / After seam end / Ignore
    Factory setting: Error
    Error
    If the wire buffer is empty, welding is interrupted and an error message is displayed.
    After seam end
    An error message is displayed after current welding is complete, and starting further welding is prevented.
    Ignore
    No reaction when wire buffer is empty
    2Press and turn the dial and select the desired parameter
    3Select "OK" to confirm the settings

    Defaults

    Defaults

    General

    NOTE!

    Because of firmware updates, certain functions may be available for your device but not described in these Operating Instructions or vice versa.

    In addition, individual figures may also differ slightly from the operating elements of your device. These operating elements function in exactly the same way, however.

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation and work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    All the work and functions described in this document must only be carried out by technically trained and qualified personnel.

    Read and understand this document in full.

    Read and understand all safety rules and user documentation for this equipment and all system components.

    1. Defaults

    Defaults

    General

    NOTE!

    Because of firmware updates, certain functions may be available for your device but not described in these Operating Instructions or vice versa.

    In addition, individual figures may also differ slightly from the operating elements of your device. These operating elements function in exactly the same way, however.

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation and work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    All the work and functions described in this document must only be carried out by technically trained and qualified personnel.

    Read and understand this document in full.

    Read and understand all safety rules and user documentation for this equipment and all system components.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults

    General

    NOTE!

    Because of firmware updates, certain functions may be available for your device but not described in these Operating Instructions or vice versa.

    In addition, individual figures may also differ slightly from the operating elements of your device. These operating elements function in exactly the same way, however.

    WARNING!

    Danger from incorrect operation and work that is not carried out properly.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    All the work and functions described in this document must only be carried out by technically trained and qualified personnel.

    Read and understand this document in full.

    Read and understand all safety rules and user documentation for this equipment and all system components.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults

    Overview

    The "Defaults" contain the following options:

    • Display
    • System
    • Documentation
    • Management
    1. Defaults

    Defaults - View

    Defaults screen

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - View

    Defaults screen

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - View

    Selecting the language

    1Select Defaults / View / Language
    2Turn the selection dial and select the desired language
    3Select "OK"/press the selection dial
    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - View

    Selecting units/standards

    1Select Defaults / View / Units/Standards
    2Select the desired unit
    3Select the desired standard:

    EN
    Designation of the filler metal according to European standards
    (e.g., AlMg 5, CuSi3, steel, etc.)
    AWS
    Designation of the filler metal according to specifications of the American Welding Standard
    (e.g., ER 5356, ER CuSi-A, ER 70 S-6, etc.)
    4Select the desired display of the welding data at the end of welding

    Hold
    The current actual values at the end of welding are displayed.

    Mean
    The average values over the entire main current phase are displayed.
    5Select OK

    The overview of units and standards is displayed.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - View

    Setting the date and time

    The date and time can be assigned via NTP (Network Time Protocol) or set manually.

    1Select Defaults / View / Time & Date

    Setting the date and time via NTP
    A DNS server must be reachable or must be configured when manually setting the network parameters (see Setting network parameters manually, page (→)).

    2Turn the dial and select "Time & Date Automatic"
    3Enter the address of the local time server
    The address of the local time server can be obtained from your IT administrator or via the Internet (e.g., pool.ntb.org).
    4Enter the time zone
    The time zone must match the location of the welding machine.
    5Select "Time Server Test" to start time synchronization

    The time of the NTP server is synchronized with the welding machine. If NTP is set, the time is also synchronized after the welding machine is restarted, provided a connection to the time server can be established.

    6Select "Transfer"

    Setting the date and time manually
    To set the date and time manually, "Automatic date & time" must not be selected.

    2Turn the dial and select the desired parameter:
    Year/Month/Day/Hour/Minute
    (white background)
    3Press the dial to change the parameter (blue background)
    4Turn the dial and set the desired value (blue background)
    5Press the dial and apply the set value (white background)
    6Select "OK"/press the dial

    The View defaults are displayed.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - View

    Retrieving system data

    1Select Defaults / View / System data

    The current system data is displayed.

    Real-time arc power in kW

    IP provides the correct average arc power as a result of the high measurement sampling rate for non-continuous welding processes.

    If the welding speed is known, the electrical energy per unit length can be calculated:

    E = IP / vs

    E
    Electrical energy per unit length in kJ/cm
    IP
    Arc power in kW
    vs
    Welding speed in cm/s

    Arc energy in kJ

    IE provides the correct total arc energy as a result of the high measurement sampling rate for non-continuous welding processes.
    Arc energy is the accumulated arc power over the entire welding time.
    If the weld length is known, the electrical energy per unit length can be calculated:

    E = IE / L

    E
    Electrical energy per unit length in kJ/cm
    IE
    Arc energy in kJ
    L
    Length of weld in cm

    Arc energy is generally used in manual welding to calculate the energy per unit length.

    Current welding speed in cm/min

    Currently set job

    Current weld

    Duration of weld in s

    Present motor current in A, wirefeeder 1
    (wirefeeder closest to the arc)

    Present motor current in A, wirefeeder 2
    (e.g., the rear wirefeeder in a push/pull system)

    Present motor current in A, wirefeeder 3
    (e.g., an unreeling wirefeeder in a push/pull system with an unreeling wirefeeder)

    Present motor force in N, wirefeeder motor 1

    Present motor force in N, wirefeeder motor 2

    Present motor force in N, wirefeeder motor 3

    Present flow rate in l/min at the cooling unit
    (if OPT/i CU flow temperature sensor option is installed)

    Error output if the flow rate is < 0.7 l/min

    Present shielding gas flow
    (if OPT/i gas regulator option is available)

    Total shielding gas consumption
    (if OPT/i gas regulator option is available)

    Present coolant temperature in °C at the cooling unit
    (if OPT/i CU flow temperature sensor option is installed)

    Error output if the coolant temperature is > 70 °C
    (measured at coolant return)

    Arc time in h

    Total operating hours of the welding machine in h

    2Select "OK" to exit the system data

    The View defaults are displayed.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - View

    Displaying characteristics

    1Select Defaults / View / Characteristic

    The options for displaying the characteristics are displayed.

    2Select the desired display option

    Show current characteristics:
    Only the current characteristics are displayed in the material settings.

    Show replaced characteristics:
    In addition to the current characteristics, replaced, older characteristics are also displayed in the material settings. These can also be selected while completing the material settings.
    3Select OK

    The View defaults are displayed.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - View

    Parameter view TIG

    This function enables additional parameters or settings for the TIG welding parameters to be displayed.

    • Working parameters:
      AC Balance, electrode diameter
    • Welding process parameters:
      cap mode, polarity, TIG torch operating mode
    • TIG pulse settings:
      tacking, pulse frequency, base current, duty cycle, waveform pulse, waveform base current
    • AC settings:
      AC frequency, AC current offset, waveform positive half-wave, waveform negative half-wave
    • Ignition parameters:
      HF ignition, HF ignition delay, reversed polarity ignition
    • Operating mode - default settings:
      torch trigger, arc break voltage, comfort stop sensitivity
    • Start/end settings:
      starting current time, final current time
    • 4-step settings:
      lowering current slope 1, lowering current slope 2
    • Spot welding settings:
      spot welding time
    • Gas defaults:
      gas pre-flow, gas post-flow
    • Cycle TIG:
      CycleTIG activated, interval time, interval pause time, interval cycles, base current
    • Wirefeeder settings:
      wire speed 1/2, wire start-up delay, wire end delay, wire retract end, wire position start
    • Dynamic Wire:
      wire speed correction

    Expand parameter view:

    1Select Defaults / View / Parameter view TIG
    2Turn the selection dial and select the desired parameter
    3Press the selection dial
    4Select "OK" to exit Parameter view TIG setup

    The parameter is displayed in the welding parameters, from where it can also be changed.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - View

    Parameter view TIG iJob

    This function can be used to define the functions and parameters available on a TIG JobMaster welding torch.

    • Working parameters:
      Job number, EasyJobs, starting current, UpSlope, lowering current, DownSlope, final current, AC balance, electrode diameter
    • Welding process parameters:
      cap mode, polarity
    • TIG pulse settings:
      tacking, pulse frequency, base current, duty cycle, waveform pulse, waveform base current
    • AC settings:
      AC frequency, waveform positive half-wave, waveform negative half-wave
    • Ignition parameters:
      reversed polarity ignition
    • Start/end settings:
      starting current time, final current time
    • 4-step settings:
      lowering current slope 1, lowering current slope 2
    • Spot welding settings:
      spot welding time
    • Cycle TIG:
      CycleTIG activated, interval time, interval pause time, interval cycles, base current
    • Wire speed settings:
      Wire speed 1
    • Dynamic Wire:
      TIG wire correction

    Expand parameter view TIG iJob:

    1Select Defaults / View / Parameter view TIG iJob
    2Turn the selection dial and select the desired parameter
    3Press the selection dial
    4Select "OK" to quit the parameter view iJob setup

    The parameter is displayed on the TIG JobMaster welding torch and can also be changed there.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - View

    Parameter view MIG/MAG

    This function enables additional parameters or settings for the MIG/MAG welding parameters to be displayed.

    Working parameters
    Current, voltage, material thickness, power, arc length correction, pulse/dynamic correction

    SFI parameters
    SFI, SFI Hotstart

    Process control
    Penetration stabilizer, arc length stabilizer

    SynchroPulse settings
    SynchroPulse, delta wirefeed, frequency, duty cycle (high), arc correction high, arc correction low

    Interval settings
    Interval, interval cycles, interval pause time, stitch welding time

    Process Mix
    Upper power time correction, lower power time correction, lower power correction

    CycleStep
    CMT cycle step, cycles (welding spot size), interval pause time, interval cycles

    AC settings
    AC power balance, AC cycles negative, AC cycles positive

    Start/end of welding settings
    Starting current, starting arc length correction, starting current time, slope 1, slope 2, final current, final arc length correction, final current time

    Spot welding settings
    Spot welding time

    Gas defaults
    gas set value, gas pre-flow, gas post-flow

    TWIN process control
    Pulse synchronization ratio, phase shift lead/trail, ignition delay trail


    Expand parameter view:

    1Select Defaults / View / Parameter view MIG/MAG
    2Turn the selection dial and select the desired parameter
    3Press the selection dial
    4Select "OK" to exit Parameter view MIG/MAG setup

    The parameter is displayed in the welding parameters, from where it can also be changed.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - View

    JobMaster MIG/MAG view

    This function can be used to define the functions and parameters available on a JobMaster welding torch.

    Working parameters
    Job number, EasyJobs, current, wire speed, voltage, material thickness, power, arc length correction, pulse/dynamic correction

    Welding process parameters
    Process, characteristic property, welding torch operating mode

    SFI parameters
    SFI, SFI Hotstart

    Process control
    Penetration stabilizer, arc length stabilizer

    SynchroPulse settings
    SynchroPulse, delta wirefeed, frequency, duty cycle (high), arc correction high, arc correction low

    Interval settings
    Interval, interval cycles, interval pause time, stitch welding time

    Process Mix
    Upper power time correction, lower power time correction, lower power correction

    Cycle Step
    CMT cycle step, cycles (welding spot size), interval pause time, interval cycles

    AC settings
    AC power balance, AC cycles negative, AC cycles positive

    Start/end of welding settings
    Starting current, starting arc length correction, starting current time, slope 1, slope 2, final current, final arc length correction, final current time

    Spot welding settings
    Spot welding time

    Gas defaults
    gas set value, gas pre-flow, gas post-flow

    General settings
    R/L alignment, wire forwards/back, gas test


    Setting JobMaster welding torch parameters:

    1Select Defaults / View / JobMaster MIG/MAG view
    2Turn the selection dial and select the desired parameter
    3Press the selection dial
    4Select "OK" to quit the parameter view iJob setup

    The parameter is displayed on the JobMaster welding torch, from where it can also be changed.

    1. Defaults

    Defaults - System

    Defaults - System

    NOTE!

    Depending on the device type, equipment, and available WeldingPackages, the display and the sequence of the system defaults may vary.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Defaults - System

    NOTE!

    Depending on the device type, equipment, and available WeldingPackages, the display and the sequence of the system defaults may vary.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Retrieving device information

    1Select Defaults / System / Information

    The device information is displayed:
    serial number, image version, software version, IP address

    2Select "OK" to quit the device information
    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Restoring factory settings

    1Select Defaults / System / Restore factory settings

    The confirmation prompt for the factory settings appears.

    2Select "Yes" to reset the values to their factory settings

    The process parameter and machine default values are reset to their factory settings and the overview of system defaults is displayed.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Restoring the website password

    1Select Defaults / System / Website password

    The confirmation prompt for resetting the website password appears.

    2Select "Yes" to reset the website password

    The website password is reset to its factory setting:
    User name = admin
    Password = admin

    The overview of system defaults is displayed.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Setup mode

    1Select Defaults / System / Setup mode
    2Turn dial and select
    MIG/MAG welding torch setup
    or

    TIG welding torch setup
    3Press the selection dial
    4Turn the selection dial and select the desired parameter
    5Press the selection dial to change the parameter
    6Press the selection dial to adjust the value of the parameter
    7Press the selection dial to apply the value
    8Select OK to accept the setting and to exit Setup mode

    MIG/MAG welding torch setup

    Special 4-step = Guntrigger

    In conjunction with a JobMaster welding torch and with the special 4-step mode selected, this function enables the torch trigger to be used to switch between jobs during welding. Job switching takes place within defined job groups.
    A job group is defined by the next non-programmed job.

    Example:
    Job group 1: Job no. 3 / 4 / 5
    Job no. 6 is not occupied ==> End of job group1
    Job group 2: Job no. 7 / 8 / 9

    • When welding is started, the job with the lowest number within the job group is automatically selected.
    • Switching within a job group to the job with the next higher number is done by briefly pressing the torch trigger (< 0.5 seconds).
    • To end the welding process, press the torch trigger for more than 0.5 seconds.
    • To change to the next job group, press the parameter setting button on the Jobmaster welding torch for more than 5 seconds.

    Spot welding

    2-step = Spot welding in 2-step mode:
    The spot welding process runs while the torch trigger remains pressed and ends at the latest after the spot welding time has elapsed.
    Releasing the torch trigger stops the spot welding process before the spot welding time has elapsed.

    4-step = Spot welding in 4-step mode:
    The spot welding process starts when the torch trigger is pressed and ends at the latest when the spot welding time has elapsed.
    Pressing the torch trigger again stops the spot welding process before the spot welding time has elapsed.

    For more information about spot welding:

    • Page (→) (spot welding in general)
    • Page (→) (spot welding time)

    Special JobMaster display = on

    The following items can now be set and implemented on the Jobmaster welding torch:

    • Operating mode
    • SynchroPulse
    • Gas test

    NOTE!

    The parameter "special JobMaster display" is no longer available as of firmware version 4.0.0.

    The corresponding settings can be implemented as follows:

    Defaults / View / JobMaster MIG/MAG view
    (see page (→))

    Torch trigger job selection = on

    The function enables the torch trigger to be used to switch to the next job. Switching takes place within defined job groups.
    A job group is defined by the next non-programmed job.

    Example:
    Job group 1: Job no. 3 / 4 / 5
    Job no. 6 is not occupied ==> End of job group1
    Job group 2: Job no. 7 / 8 / 9

    • When welding is started, the job with the lowest number within the job group is automatically selected.
    • Switching within a job group to the job with the next higher number is done by briefly pressing the torch trigger (< 0.5 seconds).
    • To end the welding process, press the torch trigger for more than 0.5 seconds.
    • To switch to the next job group, briefly double-press the torch trigger
      (< 0.3 s, 2 x).

    Switching can take place when idle or during welding.

    TIG welding torch setup
    Activate / deactivate cap mode via torch trigger

    Torch trigger I2 - cap mode = on:
    Cap mode can be activated by a long press of the torch trigger

    Torch trigger I2 - cap mode = off:
    Cap mode cannot be activated by a long press of the torch trigger.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Service Connect

    Service Connect is a remote maintenance tool for fault diagnosis and troubleshooting, data analysis, and process optimization on the welding machine.
    After accepting the terms and conditions of use once directly on the control panel of the welding machine, a Fronius technician can remotely access the welding machine.

    Procedure when a problem arises on the welding machine for which remote diagnostics are requested from Fronius:

    1Select Defaults / System / Service Connect
    2Follow the displayed instructions and select "Next"

    The welding machine establishes a secure VPN connection to Fronius.
    Once the connection has been successfully established, a code is shown on the display and the green double arrow symbol appears in the status bar.
    3Pass this code on to Fronius by telephone
    4Select "Finish"

    Fronius support can begin.
    The remote operation carried out by the Fronius technician is recorded by Fronius using a video log.

    End remote operation:

    1Select Defaults / System / Service Connect

    The prompt to disconnect the connection is displayed.
    2Select "Next"

    The connection is disconnected, the Fronius technician no longer has access to the welding machine.

    Confirmation of network disconnection is displayed, the double arrow symbol in the status bar disappears.
    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Network settings

    The network settings contains the following entries:

    • Network
    • WLAN
    • Bluetooth setting
    • WeldCube Air
    • Client authorization
    • USB port
    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Setting network parameters manually

    1Select Defaults / System / Network Settings
    2Select "Network"

    The overview of network settings is displayed.
    If DHCP is activated, the IP Address, Network Mask and Default Gateway network parameters are grayed out and cannot be set.

    3Turn the selection dial and select DHCP
    4Press the selection dial

    DHCP is deactivated and the network parameters can now be set.

    5Turn the selection dial and select the desired network parameter
    6Press the selection dial

    The numeric keypad for the selected network parameter is displayed.

    7Enter a value for the network parameter
    8Select "OK" and confirm the value for the network parameter/press the selection dial

    The value for the network parameter is applied and the overview of network settings is displayed.

    9Select "Save" to apply the changes to the network settings
    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Setting up WLAN

    1Select Defaults / System / Network settings
    2Select WLAN

    The overview of WLAN settings is displayed.

    Setting the country code

    1Select "Set Country Code"
    2Press the selection dial
    3Turn the selection dial and select the appropriate country
    4Select OK

    Activating WLAN

    1Select "Activate WLAN"

    When WLAN is activated, a check mark appears in the button, and the "Add Network" and "Delete Network" buttons are active.

    Adding a network

    1Select "Add Network"

    The available WLAN networks are displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the desired WLAN network
    3Press the selection dial or select "Insert"
    4Enter data:
    • Activate DHCP
      or
    • Manual entry of IP address, network mask, default gateway, DNS server 1 and DNS server 2:
      Turn the selection dial and select the desired element,
      press the selection dial,
      enter the data using the numeric keypad,
      confirm by pressing "OK"
    5Select "OK" and add the WLAN network

    Deleting a network

    1Turn the selection dial and select the WLAN network you want to delete
    2Select "Delete Network"
    3Confirm the prompt

    The WLAN network is deleted.
    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Bluetooth setup

    General

    Each Bluetooth device has its own MAC address. The MAC address allows the device to be assigned to a specific welding machine, thus preventing any mix-ups.

    The welding machine can communicate with the following Bluetooth devices:

    • RC Panel Basic /BT remote control
    • RC Pedal TIG /BT foot-operated remote control
    • Vizor Connect /BT welding helmet

    An active Bluetooth connection is indicated in the status bar of the display by a blue Bluetooth symbol.

    In the case of Bluetooth devices of the same type, only one device can be actively connected to the welding machine for safety reasons.
    Active Bluetooth connections to several Bluetooth devices of different types are possible.

    An existing, active Bluetooth connection cannot be interrupted or influenced by another Bluetooth device.

    Bluetooth remote controls have priority over wired remote controls or manual welding torches.

    If the connection between wired or Bluetooth remote controls and the welding machine is interrupted during the welding process, the welding process is terminated.

    Configuring the Bluetooth setup

    1Select Defaults / System / Network Settings
    2Select "Bluetooth setting"

    The Bluetooth setup screen appears.

    Activating or deactivating the Bluetooth function on the welding machine

    • Select the "Activate Bluetooth" button

    Adding a Bluetooth device

    • Turn on the Bluetooth device
    • Select the "Add Device" button

      A list of all detected Bluetooth devices is displayed with their names, MAC addresses, and other info.
    • Use the dial to select the desired Bluetooth device
    • Compare the displayed MAC address with the MAC address on the device
      Select the "Add" button to establish an active connection to the selected device
    • Select the "Save" button

      The active connection is displayed under Info.

    Symbols displayed under Info:

    Active Bluetooth connection
    An active change can be made to the welding machine via the Bluetooth device.
    Depending on the availability of the data, additional information such as battery status, signal strength, etc. of the Bluetooth device is displayed.

    Paired
    A Bluetooth device has already been actively connected to a welding machine and appears in the list of Bluetooth devices.

    Inactive
    A new Bluetooth device was found or the Bluetooth device was removed by the user.

    Deleting a Bluetooth device

    • Use the dial to select the Bluetooth device to be deleted
    • Select the "Delete Device" button
    • Confirm the prompt to delete the device by pressing "OK"
    3Select "OK" to exit the Bluetooth setup
    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    WeldCube Air

    WeldCube Air is a cloud-based, centralized solution for recording welding data, process metrics, and other functionalities.
    WeldCube Air is provided as an online service.

    NOTE!

    Knowledge of the network environment is needed to set up WeldCube Air. Contact your IT department.

    Before establishing a connection to WeldCube Air:

    Enable the following ports and domains
    https://dps.prod.air.az.weldcube.com/ Port 443 (HTTPS)
    https://stpwwcpcprod001.blob.core.windows.net/ Port 443 (HTTPS)
    https://stpwwcashared.blob.core.windows.net/ Port 443 (HTTPS)
    Port 8883 (MQTT)

    Activate the time server
    Select Defaults / Display / Date & Time / Automatic Time & Date
    The maximum permitted time deviation when setting the time manually is 2 minutes.

    1Select Defaults / System / Network settings / WeldCube Air
    2Select "Enable WeldCube Air"
    3Grant permission for data transfer

    The device code and QR code are displayed:
    4Scan the QR code
    or
    open the website air.weldcube.com and select Add machine / Continue and enter the device code

    The welding machine is paired with WeldCube Air.

    Disabling WeldCube Air
    The welding machine remains paired with WeldCube Air, but no data is transferred.

    Unpairing the device
    The welding machine is disconnected from WeldCube Air—no data transfer takes place, the devices are not paired.

    For more information on WeldCube Air, see:
    https://www.weldcube.com

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Client authorization

    Increased connection security
    To increase the connection security between WeldCube Premium and the welding system, an existing connection to WeldCube Premium can be confirmed under Client authorization.

    Confirm connection:

    1Select Defaults / System / Network settings / Client authorization

    The existing connections to WeldCube Premium are displayed with WeldCupe Premium ID, URL, and the connection security status.

     

    Status of the extended connection unknown

    Extended connection pending

    Extended connection permitted

    2Select the desired WeldCub Premium connection by turning the dial
    3Press the dial or select "OK"
    4Confirm the prompt
    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Welding machine configuration

    1Select Defaults / System / Welding machine configuration

    The welding machine configuration is displayed.

    2Turn the dial and select a configuration point
    3Press the dial

    The keyboard is displayed.

    4Enter the desired text using the keyboard (max. 20 characters)
    5Select "OK" to apply the text/press the dial

    The text is applied and the welding machine configuration is displayed.

    6Select "Save" to apply the changes
    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Wirefeeder setup

    In the wirefeeder setup, potentiometers present on a wire feeder can be activated or deactivated.

    1Select Defaults / System / Wire feeder setup
    2Press the selection dial
    3Turn dial and activate or deactivate potentiometer
    4Select OK
    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    Interface setup

    The interface setup allows the user to define whether the welding parameters are specified externally by the robot controller or internally by the welding machine.

    1Select Defaults / System / Next page
    2Select Interface setup
    3Set the "Welding parameters" parameter to "External" or "Internal"

    External:
    All parameter settings are made via the robot controller (including the welding parameters).

    Internal:
    The welding parameter settings are made via the welding machine, the control signals run via the robot controller.

    Factory setting:
    External
    4Select OK
    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - System

    TWIN Setup

    In TWIN Setup, welding lines 1 and 2 are assigned to the welding machines.

    1Switch on welding machine 2, leave welding machine 1 switched off
    2Place sticker 2 in a clearly visible location on welding machine 2
    3For welding machine 2, select Defaults / System / Next page
    4Select TWIN Setup
    5Change the parameter to 2, select Next
    6Switch on welding machine 1
    7Place sticker 1 in a clearly visible location on welding machine 1
    8For welding machine 1, select Defaults / System / Next page
    9Select TWIN Setup
    10Check that the parameter is set to 1
    1. Defaults

    Defaults - Documentation

    Defaults - Documentation

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - Documentation

    Defaults - Documentation

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - Documentation

    Setting the sample rate

    1Select Defaults / Documentation / Basic settings
    2Press the selection dial
    3Turn the selection dial and change the sample rate value:

    off
    Sample rate is deactivated, only mean values are saved.

    0.1 - 100.0 s
    Documentation is saved at the set sample rate.
    4Select "OK" to apply the sample rate

    The documentation overview is displayed.

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - Documentation

    Viewing the logbook

    1Select Defaults / Documentation / Logbook

    The logbook is displayed.
    The buttons can be used to display welds, events, errors, warnings or notifications.

    The following data is logged:

    (1)
    Number of the weld
    (2)
    Date (ddmmyy)
    (3)
    Time (hhmmss)
    (4)
    Duration of welding in s
    (5)
    Welding current in A (average)
    (6)
    Welding voltage in V (average)
    (7)
    Wire speed in m/min
    (8)
    Arc energy in kJ (for details see page (→))
    (9)
    Job No.

    Turn the selection dial to scroll through the list.

    2Select "OK" to exit the logbook
    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults - Documentation

    Switching limit value monitoring on/off

    Limit value monitoring is only available in conjunction with the OPT/i LimitMonitoring option.

    1Select Defaults / Documentation / Limit monitoring
    2Press the selection dial
    3Turn the selection dial and change the value for Limit Monitoring:

    off:
    Limit value monitoring is deactivated.

    on:
    The limit values are monitored according to the settings

    Factory setting:
    off
    4Select OK to apply the settings for limit value monitoring

    The documentation overview is displayed.

    1. Defaults

    Defaults Administration

    Defaults Administration

    1. Defaults
    2. Defaults Administration

    Defaults Administration

    1. Defaults

    User management

    General

    User management is useful if multiple users are working with the same welding machine.
    User management is carried out using different roles and with the help of NFC keys.

    Users are assigned different roles depending on their level of training or qualification.

    1. Defaults
    2. User management

    General

    User management is useful if multiple users are working with the same welding machine.
    User management is carried out using different roles and with the help of NFC keys.

    Users are assigned different roles depending on their level of training or qualification.

    1. Defaults
    2. User management

    Explanation of terms

    Administrator
    An administrator has full access to all welding machine functions. An administrator's tasks include:
    • Creating roles
    • Setting up and managing user data
    • Assigning access rights
    • Updating the firmware
    • Backing up data, etc.

    User management
    User management includes all users registered on the welding machine. Users are assigned different roles depending on their level of training or qualification.

    NFC card
    An NFC card or and NFC key fob is assigned to a specific user who is registered on the welding machine.
    NFC cards and NFC key fobs are commonly referred to as an NFC key in these Operating Instructions.

    IMPORTANT! Each user should be assigned their own NFC key.

    Role
    Roles are used to manage registered users (= user management). The roles define access rights and the work activities that users can perform.

    1. Defaults
    2. User management

    Predefined roles and users

    Two roles are predefined in the factory under Defaults / Administration / User management:

    Administrator
    with all rights and options

    The "Administrator" role cannot be deleted, renamed, or edited.

    The "Administrator" role contains the predefined "admin" user, which cannot be deleted. The "Admin" user can be assigned a name, language, unit, web password, and NFC key.
    Once "admin" has been assigned an NFC key, user management is activated.

    Locked
    Preset in the factory with access rights to the welding processes, without process parameters and defaults

    The role "Locked":

    • Cannot be deleted or renamed,
    • Can be edited in order to activate various functions as required,

    NFC keys cannot be assigned to the "Locked" role.

    If no NFC key is assigned to the predefined "Admin" user, each NFC key functions to lock and unlock the welding machine (no user management, see also section "Locking and unlocking the welding machine using an NFC key", page (→)).

    1. Defaults
    2. User management

    User administration overview

    User management contains the following sections:

    • Creating administrator and roles
    • Creating users
    • Editing roles/users, deactivating user management
    1. Defaults

    Create administrator and roles

    Recommendation for creating roles and users

    A systematic procedure is required when creating roles and NFC keys.

    Fronius recommends that you create one or two administrator keys. In the worst case scenario, a welding machine can no longer be operated without administrator rights.

    Procedure

    NOTE!

    The loss of an administrator NFC key may affect welding machine usability, depending on your settings. Store one of the two administrator NFC keys in a safe place.

    1In the "Administrator" role, create two equivalent users

    This ensures that access to the administrator function is retained even if an administrator NFC key is lost.
    2Consider other roles:
    • How many roles are required?
    • Which rights are assigned to the respective roles?
    • How many users are there?
    3Create roles
    4Assign users to roles
    5Check whether the created users have access to the respective roles with their NFC keys.
    1. Defaults
    2. Create administrator and roles

    Recommendation for creating roles and users

    A systematic procedure is required when creating roles and NFC keys.

    Fronius recommends that you create one or two administrator keys. In the worst case scenario, a welding machine can no longer be operated without administrator rights.

    Procedure

    NOTE!

    The loss of an administrator NFC key may affect welding machine usability, depending on your settings. Store one of the two administrator NFC keys in a safe place.

    1In the "Administrator" role, create two equivalent users

    This ensures that access to the administrator function is retained even if an administrator NFC key is lost.
    2Consider other roles:
    • How many roles are required?
    • Which rights are assigned to the respective roles?
    • How many users are there?
    3Create roles
    4Assign users to roles
    5Check whether the created users have access to the respective roles with their NFC keys.
    1. Defaults
    2. Create administrator and roles

    Creating an administrator key

    NOTE!

    If an NFC key is assigned to the predefined "Admin" user under Defaults / Administration / User management / Administrator, then user management is activated.

    1Select Defaults / Administration / User management

    User management is displayed, "Administrator" is selected.

    2Press the selection dial
    3Turn the selection dial and select "Admin"
    4Press the selection dial
    5Turn the selection dial and select NFC card
    6Press the selection dial

    The info for transferring the NFC card is displayed.

    7Follow the on-screen instructions
    (hold the new NFC key on the reading zone for NFC keys and wait for confirmation that it has been recognized)
    8Select OK

    The message confirming that user management is activated is displayed.

    9Select OK

    The number of the assigned NFC key is displayed under Admin / NFC card.

    To create a 2nd administrator key:

    • Copy "Admin" (Create new from selection - see also page (→))
    • Enter a user name
    • Assign a new NFC card
    1. Defaults
    2. Create administrator and roles

    Creating roles

    1Select Defaults / Administration / User management

    User management is displayed.

    2Select "Create role"

    The keyboard is displayed.

    3Enter the desired role name using the keyboard (max. 20 characters)
    4Select "OK" to apply the role name/press the selection dial

    The functions that can be executed within a role are displayed.

    Symbols:

    ... hidden

    ... read only

    ... read and write

    5Specify functions that a user can execute with this role
    • Select functions by turning the selection dial
    • Press the selection dial
    • Select settings from the list
    • Press the selection dial
    6Select OK
    1. Defaults
    2. Create administrator and roles

    Copying roles

    1Select Defaults / Administration / User management

    User management is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the role to be copied
    3Select "new from"
    4Enter the name of the new role using the keyboard
    5Select OK
    6Specify the functions that can be executed within the role
    • Select the function by turning the selection dial
    • Press the selection dial
    • Select settings for the functions from the list
    7Select OK
    1. Defaults

    Creating users

    Creating users

    NOTE!

    For data privacy reasons, only personal ID numbers and no full names should be entered when creating users.

    1Select Defaults / Administration / User management

    User management is displayed.

    2Select "create user"

    The keyboard is displayed.

    3Enter the desired user name using the keyboard (max. 20 characters)
    4Select "OK" to apply the user name/press the selection dial
    5Enter additional user data
    - Select the parameter by turning the selection dial
    - Press the selection dial
    - Select Role, Language, Unit, and Standard from the list
    - Enter first name, last name and web password using the keyboard
    6Turn the selection dial and select NFC card
    7Press the selection dial

    The info for transferring the NFC card is displayed.

    8Follow the on-screen instructions
    (hold the new NFC key on the reading zone for NFC keys and wait for confirmation that it has been recognized)
    1. Defaults
    2. Creating users

    Creating users

    NOTE!

    For data privacy reasons, only personal ID numbers and no full names should be entered when creating users.

    1Select Defaults / Administration / User management

    User management is displayed.

    2Select "create user"

    The keyboard is displayed.

    3Enter the desired user name using the keyboard (max. 20 characters)
    4Select "OK" to apply the user name/press the selection dial
    5Enter additional user data
    - Select the parameter by turning the selection dial
    - Press the selection dial
    - Select Role, Language, Unit, and Standard from the list
    - Enter first name, last name and web password using the keyboard
    6Turn the selection dial and select NFC card
    7Press the selection dial

    The info for transferring the NFC card is displayed.

    8Follow the on-screen instructions
    (hold the new NFC key on the reading zone for NFC keys and wait for confirmation that it has been recognized)
    1. Defaults
    2. Creating users

    Copying users

    NOTE!

    For data privacy reasons, only personal ID numbers and no full names should be entered when creating users.

    1Select Defaults / Administration / User management

    User management is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the role to which the user to be copied is assigned
    3Press the selection dial
    4Turn the selection dial and select the user to be copied
    5Select "new from"
    6Enter the name of the new user using the keyboard
    7Select OK
    8Enter additional user data
    9Assign a new NFC key
    10Select OK
    1. Defaults

    Editing roles/users, deactivating user management

    Editing roles

    1Select Defaults / Administration / User management

    User management is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the desired role
    3Select "Edit user/role"

    The role opens, the functions can be changed:

    • Select the function by turning the selection dial
    • Press the selection dial
    • Change the role name using the keyboard
    • Select settings for the functions from the list
    4Select OK

    If no user is stored for a role, the editing of the role can also be started by pressing the selection dial.

    1. Defaults
    2. Editing roles/users, deactivating user management

    Editing roles

    1Select Defaults / Administration / User management

    User management is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the desired role
    3Select "Edit user/role"

    The role opens, the functions can be changed:

    • Select the function by turning the selection dial
    • Press the selection dial
    • Change the role name using the keyboard
    • Select settings for the functions from the list
    4Select OK

    If no user is stored for a role, the editing of the role can also be started by pressing the selection dial.

    1. Defaults
    2. Editing roles/users, deactivating user management

    Deleting roles

    1Select Defaults / Administration / User management

    User management is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the role to be deleted
    3Select "Delete user/role"
    4Confirm the prompt

    The role and all assigned users are deleted.

    1. Defaults
    2. Editing roles/users, deactivating user management

    Editing users

    1Select Defaults / Administration / User management

    User management is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the role to which the user to be edited is assigned
    3Press the selection dial

    The users assigned to the role are displayed.

    4Turn the selection dial and select the user to be edited
    5Select "Edit user/role" (or press the selection dial)
    • Select the parameter by turning the selection dial
    • Press the selection dial
    • Change the name and web password using the keyboard
    • Select other settings from the list
    Replacing the NFC card:
    • Turn the selection dial and select "NFC card"
    • Press the selection dial
    • Select "Replace"
    • Hold the new NFC key on the reading zone for NFC keys and wait for confirmation that it has been recognized
    • Select OK
    6Select OK
    1. Defaults
    2. Editing roles/users, deactivating user management

    Deleting users

    1Select Defaults / Administration / User management

    User management is displayed.

    2Turn the selection dial and select the role to which the user to be deleted is assigned
    3Press the selection dial
    4Turn the selection dial and select the user to be deleted
    5Select "Delete user/role"
    6Confirm the prompt

    The user is deleted.

    1. Defaults
    2. Editing roles/users, deactivating user management

    Deactivating user management

    1Select the predefined "Admin" user under Defaults / Administration / User management / Administrator
    2Turn the dial and select NFC card
    3Press the dial

    The prompt to delete or replace the NFC card is displayed.

    NOTE!

    If the NFC card for the predefined "Admin" user is deleted, user management is deactivated.

    4Select "Delete"

    User management is deactivated, the welding machine is locked.
    The welding machine can be unlocked and locked again with any NFC key (see also page (→)).

    1. Defaults
    2. Editing roles/users, deactivating user management

    Lost administrator NFC key?

    Procedure if

    • user management is activated
    • the welding machine is locked
      , and
    • the administrator NFC key has been lost:
    1Touch the key symbol in the status bar on the display

    The information regarding the loss of the administrator card is displayed.
    2Note down the IP address of the welding machine
    3Open the SmartManager for the welding machine (enter the IP address of the welding machine in a browser)
    4Inform the Fronius service team
    1. Defaults

    CENTRUM - Central User Management

    Activating the CENTRUM server

    CENTRUM is a piece of software used for central user management. For detailed information, refer to the CENTRUM Operating Instructions (42,0426.0338,xx).

    THE CENTRUM server can also be activated directly on the welding machine as follows:

    1Select Defaults / Administration / CENTRUM Server

    The Central User Management Server is displayed.

    2Activate CENTRUM Server (press dial)
    3Select CENTRUM Server, press the dial and enter the address of the CENTRUM server using the keyboard
    4Select the Verify CENTRUM button
    5Save
    1. Defaults
    2. CENTRUM - Central User Management

    Activating the CENTRUM server

    CENTRUM is a piece of software used for central user management. For detailed information, refer to the CENTRUM Operating Instructions (42,0426.0338,xx).

    THE CENTRUM server can also be activated directly on the welding machine as follows:

    1Select Defaults / Administration / CENTRUM Server

    The Central User Management Server is displayed.

    2Activate CENTRUM Server (press dial)
    3Select CENTRUM Server, press the dial and enter the address of the CENTRUM server using the keyboard
    4Select the Verify CENTRUM button
    5Save

    SmartManager – the welding machine website

    SmartManager – the welding machine website

    General

    With the SmartManager, the welding machines have their own website.
    Once the welding machine is connected to a computer via WLAN or a network cable, or is integrated into a network, the SmartManager of the welding machine can be accessed via the IP address of the welding machine.
    IE 10 or higher or another modern browser is required in order to access the SmartManager.

    The entries displayed on the SmartManager may vary depending on the system configuration, software extensions and options available.

    Examples of displayed entries:

    • Current system data
    • Documentation logbook
    • Job data
    • Welding machine settings
    • Save and restore
    • User administration
    • Overview
    • Update
    • Function packages
    • Screenshot
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    SmartManager – the welding machine website

    General

    With the SmartManager, the welding machines have their own website.
    Once the welding machine is connected to a computer via WLAN or a network cable, or is integrated into a network, the SmartManager of the welding machine can be accessed via the IP address of the welding machine.
    IE 10 or higher or another modern browser is required in order to access the SmartManager.

    The entries displayed on the SmartManager may vary depending on the system configuration, software extensions and options available.

    Examples of displayed entries:

    • Current system data
    • Documentation logbook
    • Job data
    • Welding machine settings
    • Save and restore
    • User administration
    • Overview
    • Update
    • Function packages
    • Screenshot
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    General

    With the SmartManager, the welding machines have their own website.
    Once the welding machine is connected to a computer via WLAN or a network cable, or is integrated into a network, the SmartManager of the welding machine can be accessed via the IP address of the welding machine.
    IE 10 or higher or another modern browser is required in order to access the SmartManager.

    The entries displayed on the SmartManager may vary depending on the system configuration, software extensions and options available.

    Examples of displayed entries:

    • Current system data
    • Documentation logbook
    • Job data
    • Welding machine settings
    • Save and restore
    • User administration
    • Overview
    • Update
    • Function packages
    • Screenshot
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Opening and logging into the SmartManager for the welding machine

    1Defaults / System / Information ==> note down the IP address of the welding machine
    2Enter the IP address into the search field of the browser
    3Enter user name and password

    Factory setting:
    User name = admin
    Password = admin
    4Confirm the displayed message

    The SmartManager for the welding machine is displayed.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Help functions if logging in does not work

    There are two help functions when logging into the SmartManager:

    • Start unlock function?
    • Forgot your password?

    Start unlock function?

    This feature allows you to unlock an unintentionally locked welding machine and enable it for all functions.

    1Click on "Start unlock function?"
    2Create a verification file:
    click on "Store"

    A .txt file with the following file name is saved in the computer's download folder:

    unlock_SN[serial number]_YYYY_MM_DD_hhmmss.txt

    3Send this verification file via e-mail to the Fronius tech support team at:
    welding.techsupport@fronius.com

    Fronius will reply by e-mail with a one-time unlock file with the following file name:

    response_SN[serial number]_YYYY_MM_DD_hhmmss.txt

    4Save the unlock file to the computer
    5Click on "Find unlock file"
    6Save the unlock file
    7Click on "Load unlock file"

    The welding machine is temporarily unlocked.

    Forgot your password?

    After clicking on "Forgot your password?", a note appears indicating that the password can be reset on the welding machine (see also "Restoring the website password", page (→)).

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Changing the password/logging out

    Click on this symbol to

    • change the user password
    • log out of the SmartManager

    Changing the password for the SmartManager:

    1Enter the old password
    2Enter a new password
    3Repeat the new password
    4Click on "Store"
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Settings

    Click on this symbol to expand the display of characteristics, material specifications and certain welding parameters on the SmartManager for the welding machine.

    The settings depend on the user who is logged in.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Language selection

    Click on the language abbreviation to display the languages available for the SmartManager.

    To change the language, click on the desired language.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Status indicator

    The current status of the welding machine is displayed between the Fronius logo and the selected welding machine.

    Caution/warning

    Error on the welding machine *

    Welding machine is welding

    Welding machine is ready for use (online)

    Welding machine is not ready for use (offline)

     

    *
    In the event of an error, a red error line with the error number appears above the line with the Fronius logo.
    After clicking on the error line, an error description is displayed.
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Fronius

    Click on the Fronius logo to open the Fronius homepage: www.fronius.com

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Current system data

    Current system data

    Current welding system data is displayed.

    NOTE!

    Depending on the welding process, equipment, and existing WeldingPackages, the system data displayed will vary.

    e.g., system data for TIG AC:

    (1)
    Device type
    (2)
    Device name
    (3)
    Factory
    (4)
    Hall
    (5)
    Cell
    (6)
    Welding process
    (7)
    Actual values / HOLD or Average values (depending on setting)
    (8)
    Welding current
    (9)
    Welding voltage
    (10)
    Arc time
    (11)
    Arc energy
    (12)
    Arc power
    (13)
    Welding current command value
    (14)
    AC balance
    (15)
    Starting current set value
    (16)
    Final current set value
    (17)
    Electrode diameter
    (18)
    UpSlope
    (19)
    DownSlope
    (20)
    Polarity
    (21)
    Total arc energy
    (22)
    Total shielding gas consumption
    (23)
    Total arc time
    (24)
    Total operating hours of the welding machine
    (25)
    Operating mode
    (26)
    AC or DC
    (27)
    HF ignition
    (28)
    Pulse frequency
    (29)
    CyclTIG
    (30)
    Full screen mode
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Current system data

    Current system data

    Current welding system data is displayed.

    NOTE!

    Depending on the welding process, equipment, and existing WeldingPackages, the system data displayed will vary.

    e.g., system data for TIG AC:

    (1)
    Device type
    (2)
    Device name
    (3)
    Factory
    (4)
    Hall
    (5)
    Cell
    (6)
    Welding process
    (7)
    Actual values / HOLD or Average values (depending on setting)
    (8)
    Welding current
    (9)
    Welding voltage
    (10)
    Arc time
    (11)
    Arc energy
    (12)
    Arc power
    (13)
    Welding current command value
    (14)
    AC balance
    (15)
    Starting current set value
    (16)
    Final current set value
    (17)
    Electrode diameter
    (18)
    UpSlope
    (19)
    DownSlope
    (20)
    Polarity
    (21)
    Total arc energy
    (22)
    Total shielding gas consumption
    (23)
    Total arc time
    (24)
    Total operating hours of the welding machine
    (25)
    Operating mode
    (26)
    AC or DC
    (27)
    HF ignition
    (28)
    Pulse frequency
    (29)
    CyclTIG
    (30)
    Full screen mode
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Documentation logbook

    Logbook

    The documentation entry in the logbook shows the last 100 entries. These logbook entries can be welds, errors, warnings, notifications, and events.
    The "Time filter" button can be used to filter the displayed data by a specific time period. This is entered with date (yyyy MM dd) and time (hh mm), each from – to.
    An empty filter reloads the most recent welding operations.
    The display of welding operations, errors, warnings, notifications, and events can be deactivated.

    The following data is displayed:

    (1)
    Number of the weld
    (2)
    Start time (date and time)
    (3)
    Duration of welding in s
    (4)
    Welding current in A (average)
    (5)
    Welding voltage in V (average)
    (6)
    Wire speed in m/min
    (7)
    IP - arc power in W (based on real-time values according to ISO/TR 18491)
    (8)
    IE - arc energy in kJ (as the total throughout the entire welding process according to ISO/TR 18491)

    If present in the system, robot speed and jobs are also displayed.

    Clicking on a logbook entry will display the details for that entry.

    Details for welds:

    Section No.

    (9)
    Duration of the welding section in s
    (10)
    Welding current in A (average)
    (11)
    Welding voltage in V (average)
    (12)
    Wire speed in m/min
    (13)
    Welding speed (cm/min)
    (14)
    Arc power from instantaneous values in W (for details see page (→))
    (15)
    Arc energy in kJ (for details see page (→))
    (16)
    Job No.
    (17)
    Process

    Additional values can be also displayed by clicking on the "Insert column" button:

    • I max / I min: maximum/minimum welding current in A
    • Power max / Power min: maximum/minimum arc power in W
    • Start time (welding machine time); date and time
    • U max / U min: maximum/minimum welding voltage in V
    • Vd max / Vd min: maximum/minimum wire speed in m/min

    If the OPT/i documentation option is present on the welding machine, individual sections of welds can also be displayed.

    The documentation can be exported in the desired format using the "PDF" and "CSV" buttons.
    For CSV exports, the OPT/i documentation option must be present on the welding machine.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Documentation logbook

    Logbook

    The documentation entry in the logbook shows the last 100 entries. These logbook entries can be welds, errors, warnings, notifications, and events.
    The "Time filter" button can be used to filter the displayed data by a specific time period. This is entered with date (yyyy MM dd) and time (hh mm), each from – to.
    An empty filter reloads the most recent welding operations.
    The display of welding operations, errors, warnings, notifications, and events can be deactivated.

    The following data is displayed:

    (1)
    Number of the weld
    (2)
    Start time (date and time)
    (3)
    Duration of welding in s
    (4)
    Welding current in A (average)
    (5)
    Welding voltage in V (average)
    (6)
    Wire speed in m/min
    (7)
    IP - arc power in W (based on real-time values according to ISO/TR 18491)
    (8)
    IE - arc energy in kJ (as the total throughout the entire welding process according to ISO/TR 18491)

    If present in the system, robot speed and jobs are also displayed.

    Clicking on a logbook entry will display the details for that entry.

    Details for welds:

    Section No.

    (9)
    Duration of the welding section in s
    (10)
    Welding current in A (average)
    (11)
    Welding voltage in V (average)
    (12)
    Wire speed in m/min
    (13)
    Welding speed (cm/min)
    (14)
    Arc power from instantaneous values in W (for details see page (→))
    (15)
    Arc energy in kJ (for details see page (→))
    (16)
    Job No.
    (17)
    Process

    Additional values can be also displayed by clicking on the "Insert column" button:

    • I max / I min: maximum/minimum welding current in A
    • Power max / Power min: maximum/minimum arc power in W
    • Start time (welding machine time); date and time
    • U max / U min: maximum/minimum welding voltage in V
    • Vd max / Vd min: maximum/minimum wire speed in m/min

    If the OPT/i documentation option is present on the welding machine, individual sections of welds can also be displayed.

    The documentation can be exported in the desired format using the "PDF" and "CSV" buttons.
    For CSV exports, the OPT/i documentation option must be present on the welding machine.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Documentation logbook

    Basic settings

    The sampling rate for documentation can be activated and set in the basic settings.
    In addition, the motor force M1 – M3, gas flow actual value and welding speed can be activated for documentation.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Job data

    Job data

    If the OPT/i Jobs option is available on the welding machine, the following can be carried out under the Job data entry:

    • Existing jobs in the welding system can be viewed *
    • Existing jobs in the welding system can be optimized
    • Externally stored jobs can be transferred to the welding system
    • Existing jobs in the welding system can be exported as PDF * or CSV files
    *
    Viewing and exporting as a PDF also works if the OPT/i Jobs option is not available on the welding machine.
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Job data

    Job data

    If the OPT/i Jobs option is available on the welding machine, the following can be carried out under the Job data entry:

    • Existing jobs in the welding system can be viewed *
    • Existing jobs in the welding system can be optimized
    • Externally stored jobs can be transferred to the welding system
    • Existing jobs in the welding system can be exported as PDF * or CSV files
    *
    Viewing and exporting as a PDF also works if the OPT/i Jobs option is not available on the welding machine.
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Job data

    Job overview

    The job overview lists all jobs stored in the welding system.
    After clicking on a job, the data and parameters stored for this job are displayed.
    Job data and parameters can only be viewed in the job overview. The column width for parameters and values can be easily adjusted by dragging with the mouse pointer.
    Further jobs can be easily added to the list with the displayed data by clicking on the "Add column" button.

    All added jobs are compared with the selected job.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Job data

    Editing a job

    Existing jobs in the welding machine can be optimized, provided the OPT/i Jobs option is available on the welding machine.

    1Click on "Edit job"
    2In the list of existing jobs, click on the job to be edited.

    The selected job opens and the following job data is displayed:
    • Parameters
      Parameters currently stored in the job
    • Value
      Parameter values currently stored in the job
    • Change value to
      For entering the new parameter value
    • Setting range
      Possible setting range for the new parameter values
    3Change the values accordingly
    4Save/discard your changes, save job as/delete

    To help when editing the job, further jobs can be easily added to the list with the displayed data by clicking on "Add job".

    Creating a new job

    1Click on "Create new job"
    2Enter job data
    3Click on "OK" to apply the new job
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Job data

    Importing a job

    This function allows externally stored jobs to be transferred into the welding system, provided the OPT/i Jobs option is available on the welding machine.

    1Click on "Find job file"
    2Select the desired job file

    In the preview of the job import list, you can select individual jobs and assign new job numbers.
    3Click on "Import"

    If the import is successful, a confirmation is displayed and the imported jobs are displayed in the list.
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Job data

    Exporting a job

    This function allows the welding machine to store jobs externally, provided the OPT/i Jobs option is available on the welding machine.

    1Select the jobs to be exported
    2Click on "Export"

    The jobs are exported as an XML file to the computer's download folder.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Job data

    Exporting job(s) as ...

    Under Job overview and Edit job, existing jobs in the welding machine can be exported as PDF or CSV files.
    For CSV export, the OPT/i Jobs option must be available on the welding machine.

    1Click on "Export job(s) as..."

    The PDF settings or CSV settings are displayed.

    2Select the job(s) to be exported:
    Current job/all jobs/job numbers
    3Click on "Save PDF" or "Save CSV"

    A PDF or CSV file of the selected jobs is created and saved depending on the settings for the browser used.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Welding machine settings

    Process parameters

    Under Process parameters, you can view and modify general process parameters and process parameters for components & monitoring of a welding machine.

    Changing process parameters

    1Click on Parameter Group/Parameters
    2Change the value of the parameter directly in the display field
    3Save changes
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Welding machine settings

    Process parameters

    Under Process parameters, you can view and modify general process parameters and process parameters for components & monitoring of a welding machine.

    Changing process parameters

    1Click on Parameter Group/Parameters
    2Change the value of the parameter directly in the display field
    3Save changes
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Welding machine settings

    Designation & location

    The welding machine configuration can be viewed and modified under Designation & location.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Welding machine settings

    Parameter display

    Welding parameters and special functions for welding machine and JobMaster welding torch can be set under Parameter display.

    1Select parameter/function (tick)
    2Save changes

    The selected parameters / functions are:

    • shown on the welding machine's display in the welding parameters,
    • available on the JobMaster welding torch.
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Welding machine settings

    Date & time

    The date & time can be set automatically or manually.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Welding machine settings

    Network settings

    The following parameters can be set under Network settings:

    Management

    • MAC address and current IP address are displayed.
    • If DHCP is not selected, the IP address, network mask, default gateway, DNS server 1 and 2 can be set manually.

    WLAN

    • MAC address and current IP address are displayed.
    • The WLAN country code can be set.
    • Configured networks are displayed
    • Available networks are displayed

    WeldCube Air
    Connect welding machine to WeldCubeAir
    (alternatively click on the cloud icon at the top right)

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Save and restore

    General

    Under the Save and restore entry

    • all welding system data can be saved as a backup (e.g. current parameter settings, jobs, user curves, defaults, etc.)
    • existing backups can be saved again in the welding system
    • data can be configured for automatic backup
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Save and restore

    General

    Under the Save and restore entry

    • all welding system data can be saved as a backup (e.g. current parameter settings, jobs, user curves, defaults, etc.)
    • existing backups can be saved again in the welding system
    • data can be configured for automatic backup
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Save and restore

    Save and restore

    Starting a backup

    1Click on "Start backup" to save the welding machine data as a backup

    By default, the data is saved in the format MCU1-YYYYMMDDHHmm.fbc at the selected location.

    YYYY = year
    MM = month
    DD = day
    HH = hour
    mm = minute

    Date and time information according to the settings on the welding machine.

    Finding a recovery file

    1Click on "Find recovery file" to transfer an existing backup to the welding machine
    2Select the file and click on "Open"

    The selected backup file appears in the SmartManager for the welding machine under Restore.
    3Click on "Start restore"

    Once the data has been successfully restored, a confirmation is displayed.
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Save and restore

    Automatic backup

    1Enable interval settings
    2Enter the interval settings for the times at which the automatic backup should take place:
    • Interval:
      daily/weekly/monthly
    • at:
      time (hh:mm)
    3Enter the data for the backup destination:
    • Protocol:
      SFTP (Secure File Transfer Protocol) / SMB (Server Message Block)
    • Server:
      Enter the IP address of the destination server
    • Port:
      Enter port number; if no port number is entered, the standard port 22 is automatically used.
      If SMB is set under Protocol, leave the Port field blank.
    • Storage location:
      Used to configure the subfolder where the backup will be stored.
      If no location is entered, the backup is stored in the server root directory.

      IMPORTANT! For SMB and SFTB, always enter the location with a slash "/".
    • Domain/user, password:
      User name and password - as configured on the server;
      When entering a domain, first enter the domain, then backslash "\" and then the user name (DOMAIN\USER)
    4If a connection via proxy server is required, activate and enter the proxy settings:
    • Server
    • Port
    • User
    • Password
    5Save changes
    6Activate automatic backup

    If you have any questions about configuration, contact your network administrator.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Signal visualisation

    Signal visualization

    Signal visualization is only available if a robot interface is present.
    To display the signal visualization correctly, IE 10 or another modern browser is required as a minimum.

    The signals and commands transferred via a robot interface are displayed.

    IN ... Signals from the robot control to the welding machine
    OUT ... Signals from the welding machine to the robot control unit

    The displayed signals can be searched, sorted, and filtered at any time.
    To sort the characteristics in ascending or descending order, click on the arrow next to the respective information. The column widths can be dragged and adjusted with the cursor.

    The following information is required for a detailed description of the signals:

    • Bit position
    • Signal name
    • Value
    • Data type
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Signal visualisation

    Signal visualization

    Signal visualization is only available if a robot interface is present.
    To display the signal visualization correctly, IE 10 or another modern browser is required as a minimum.

    The signals and commands transferred via a robot interface are displayed.

    IN ... Signals from the robot control to the welding machine
    OUT ... Signals from the welding machine to the robot control unit

    The displayed signals can be searched, sorted, and filtered at any time.
    To sort the characteristics in ascending or descending order, click on the arrow next to the respective information. The column widths can be dragged and adjusted with the cursor.

    The following information is required for a detailed description of the signals:

    • Bit position
    • Signal name
    • Value
    • Data type
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    User management

    General

    Under the User administration entry

    • Users can be viewed, changed, and created.
    • User roles can be viewed, changed, and created.
    • Users and user roles can be exported or imported into the welding machine.
      During import, existing user management data on the welding machine is overwritten.
    • A CENTRUM server can be activated.

    User management is created on one welding machine and can then be saved with the export/import function and transferred to other welding machines.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. User management

    General

    Under the User administration entry

    • Users can be viewed, changed, and created.
    • User roles can be viewed, changed, and created.
    • Users and user roles can be exported or imported into the welding machine.
      During import, existing user management data on the welding machine is overwritten.
    • A CENTRUM server can be activated.

    User management is created on one welding machine and can then be saved with the export/import function and transferred to other welding machines.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. User management

    Users

    Existing users can be viewed, changed and deleted, new users can be created.

    Viewing/changing a user:

    1Select a user
    2Change user data directly in the display field
    3Save the changes

    Deleting a user:

    1Select a user
    2Click on the "Delete user" button
    3Confirm the prompt with "OK"

    Creating a user:

    1Click on the "Create new user" button
    2Enter user data
    3Confirm with OK
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. User management

    User roles

    Existing user roles can be viewed, changed and deleted, new user roles can be created.

    Viewing/changing a user role:

    1Select a user role
    2Change user role data directly in the display field
    3Save the changes

    The "Administrator" role cannot be changed.

    Deleting a user role:

    1Select a user role
    2Click on the "Delete user role" button
    3Confirm the prompt with "OK"

    The "Administrator" and "locked" roles cannot be deleted.

    Creating a user role:

    1Click on the "Create new user role" button
    2Enter a role name, apply values
    3Confirm with OK
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. User management

    Export & import

    Exporting users and user roles from a welding machine

    1Click on "export"

    User management for the welding machine is stored in the computer's download folder.
    File format: userbackup_SNxxxxxxxx_YYYY_MM_DD_hhmmss.user

    SN = serial number, YYYY = year, MM = month, DD = day
    hh = hour, mm = minute, ss = second

    Importing users and user roles into a welding machine

    1Click on "Find user data file"
    2Select the file and click on "open"
    3Click on "import"

    User management is stored on the welding machine.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. User management

    CENTRUM Server

    To activate a CENTRUM server
    (CENTRUM = Central User Management)

    1Activate CENTRUM Server
    2In the input field, enter the domain name or IP address of the server on which Central User Management has been installed.

    If a domain name is used, a valid DNS server must be configured under the welding machine network settings.
    3Click on the "Verify server" button.

    The availability of the specified server is checked.
    4Save changes
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Overview

    Overview

    The Overview entry displays the components and options in the welding system with all the available information, e.g. firmware version, item number, serial number, production date, etc.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Overview

    Overview

    The Overview entry displays the components and options in the welding system with all the available information, e.g. firmware version, item number, serial number, production date, etc.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Overview

    Expanding all groups/collapsing all groups

    Click on the "Expand all groups" button to see further details about the individual system components.

    Example welding machine:

    • TPSi Touch: Item number
      MCU1: Item number, version, serial number, production date
      Bootloader: Version
      Image: Version
      Licenses: WP Standard, WP Pulse, WP LSC, WP PMC, OPT/i Guntrigger, etc.
    • SC2: Item number
      Firmware: Version

    Click on the "Collapse all groups" button to hide the details of the system components.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Overview

    Export component overview as ...

    Click on the "Export component overview as" button to create an XML file from the details of the system components. This XML file can either be opened or saved.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Update

    Update

    Under the Update entry, the firmware of the welding machine can be updated.

    The welding machine's current firmware version is displayed.

    To update the firmware of the welding machine:

    Firmware link:
    The update file can be downloaded via the link provided:
    Firmware TPS/i_iWAVE

    1Organize and save the update file
    2Click on "Find update file" to start the update process
    3Select the update fileClick on "Update"

    After the update has been completed, the welding machine may need to be restarted.

    After the update has been successfully completed, a confirmation message is displayed.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Update

    Update

    Under the Update entry, the firmware of the welding machine can be updated.

    The welding machine's current firmware version is displayed.

    To update the firmware of the welding machine:

    Firmware link:
    The update file can be downloaded via the link provided:
    Firmware TPS/i_iWAVE

    1Organize and save the update file
    2Click on "Find update file" to start the update process
    3Select the update fileClick on "Update"

    After the update has been completed, the welding machine may need to be restarted.

    After the update has been successfully completed, a confirmation message is displayed.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Update

    Finding the update file (performing an update)

    1After clicking on "Find update file", select the desired firmware (*.ffw)
    2Click on "Open"

    The selected update file appears in the SmartManager for the welding machine under Update.
    3Click on "Update"

    The progress of the update process is displayed.
    Once this reaches 100%, the prompt to restart the welding machine appears.

    The SmartManager is not available during the restart.
    After the restart, the SmartManager may no longer be available.
    If you select No, the new software functions will be activated the next time the power is turned on/off.

    4To restart the welding machine, click on "Yes"

    The welding machine restarts, the display goes dark for a short time.
    During the restart, the welding machine display shows the Fronius logo.

    After the update has been successfully completed, a confirmation and the current firmware version are displayed.
    Then log into the SmartManager again.
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Update

    Fronius WeldConnect

    Under the Update entry, the Fronius WeldConnect mobile application can also be called up.
    WeldConnect is an app for wireless interaction with the welding system.

    WeldConnect can be used to perform the following functions:

    • Current device configuration at a glance
    • Mobile access to the SmartManager of the welding machine
    • Automatic determination of output parameters for MIG/MAG and TIG
    • Cloud storage and wireless transmission to the welding machine
    • Component identification
    • Log on and off the welding machine without NFC card
    • Save and share parameters and jobs
    • Data transfer from one welding machine to another by means of backup, restore
    • Firmware update

    Fronius WeldConnect is available as follows:

    • As an app for Android
    • As an app for Apple/IOS

    For more information on Fronius WeldConnect, visit:

    https://www.fronius.com/en/welding-technology/innovative-solutions/weldconnect
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Function packages

    Function packages

    The following data can be displayed under function packages:

    • At the welding machine, existing Welding Packages
      (e.g., WP STANDARD, WP PULSE, WP LSC, etc.)
    • DB /i (databases)
    • Options available on the welding machine (OPT/i ...)
    • CFG /i (robot interface configurations)
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Function packages

    Function packages

    The following data can be displayed under function packages:

    • At the welding machine, existing Welding Packages
      (e.g., WP STANDARD, WP PULSE, WP LSC, etc.)
    • DB /i (databases)
    • Options available on the welding machine (OPT/i ...)
    • CFG /i (robot interface configurations)
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Function packages

    Welding Packages

    Under Welding Packages, the welding packages available on the welding machine are displayed with the respective item numbers, e.g.:

    • WP Standard (MIG/MAG standard synergic welding)
    • WP Pulse (MIG/MAG pulsed synergic welding)
    • WP LSC (Low Spatter Control, low-spatter dip transfer arc process)
    • WP PMC (Pulse Multi Control, advanced pulsed arc welding process)

    Possible extensions:

    • WP CMT
    • etc.
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Function packages

    Options

    Under Options, the options available on the welding machine are displayed with the respective item numbers and possible extensions, e.g.,

    Options

    • OPT/i GUN Trigger
    • etc.

    Possible extensions

    • OPT/i Jobs
    • OPT/i Interface Designer...
    • etc.
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Function packages

    Loading a function package

    1Organize and save the function package
    2Click on "Find function package file"
    3Select the desired function package file (*.xml)
    4Click on "Open"

    The selected function package file appears in the SmartManager for the welding machine Function package.
    5Click on "Load function package"

    Once the function package has been successfully loaded, a confirmation is displayed.
    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Synergic lines overview

    Overview of characteristics

    In the Overview of characteristics entry:

    • available characteristics in the welding system can be displayed:
      Available characteristics button
    • possible characteristics in the welding system can be displayed:
      Possible characteristics button
    • characteristics for the welding system can be preselected:
      Characteristic preselection button
    • saved characteristic preselections can be exported and imported:
      Export & import button

    You can search for, sort and filter the displayed characteristics at any time.

    The following information is displayed for the characteristics:

    • Status
    • Material
    • Diameter
    • Gas
    • Property
    • Process
    • ID
    • replaced by
    • SFI
    • SFI HotStart
    • Penetration stabilizer
    • Arc length stabilizer
    • CMT Cycle Step
    • Special
    • Requirements

    To sort the characteristics in ascending or descending order, click on the arrow next to the corresponding information.

    The column widths can be easily adjusted by dragging with the mouse cursor.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Synergic lines overview

    Overview of characteristics

    In the Overview of characteristics entry:

    • available characteristics in the welding system can be displayed:
      Available characteristics button
    • possible characteristics in the welding system can be displayed:
      Possible characteristics button
    • characteristics for the welding system can be preselected:
      Characteristic preselection button
    • saved characteristic preselections can be exported and imported:
      Export & import button

    You can search for, sort and filter the displayed characteristics at any time.

    The following information is displayed for the characteristics:

    • Status
    • Material
    • Diameter
    • Gas
    • Property
    • Process
    • ID
    • replaced by
    • SFI
    • SFI HotStart
    • Penetration stabilizer
    • Arc length stabilizer
    • CMT Cycle Step
    • Special
    • Requirements

    To sort the characteristics in ascending or descending order, click on the arrow next to the corresponding information.

    The column widths can be easily adjusted by dragging with the mouse cursor.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Synergic lines overview

    Show filter

    Click on the "Show filter" symbol to display the possible filter criteria. With the exception of "ID" and "Replaced by", the characteristics can be filtered by all information.

    First selection box = select all

    To hide the filter criteria, click on the "Hide filter" symbol.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Screenshot

    Screenshot

    Under the Screenshot entry, a digital image of the welding machine display can be created at any time, regardless of navigation or set values.

    1Click on "Take screenshot" to take a screenshot of the display

    The screenshot is taken with the settings currently displayed on the display.

    Depending on the browser you are using, different functions are available for saving the screenshot, and the display may vary.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Screenshot

    Screenshot

    Under the Screenshot entry, a digital image of the welding machine display can be created at any time, regardless of navigation or set values.

    1Click on "Take screenshot" to take a screenshot of the display

    The screenshot is taken with the settings currently displayed on the display.

    Depending on the browser you are using, different functions are available for saving the screenshot, and the display may vary.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website

    Interface

    Interface

    If a robot interface is available, the name of the interface will be displayed as an entry on the website of the welding machine.

    The following welding parameters can be displayed, edited, saved or deleted:

    • Characteristic assignment (current allocation of program numbers to characteristics)
    • Module configuration (network settings)

    Factory settings can be restored and the module can be restarted.

    1. SmartManager – the welding machine website
    2. Interface

    Interface

    If a robot interface is available, the name of the interface will be displayed as an entry on the website of the welding machine.

    The following welding parameters can be displayed, edited, saved or deleted:

    • Characteristic assignment (current allocation of program numbers to characteristics)
    • Module configuration (network settings)

    Factory settings can be restored and the module can be restarted.

    Troubleshooting and Maintenance

    Troubleshooting

    General

    The welding machines are equipped with an intelligent safety system, making it possible to dispense with nearly all fuses. After correcting any errors, the welding machine can be operated properly again.

    Possible malfunctions, warning notices or status codes are shown on the display as plain text dialogs.

    1. Troubleshooting and Maintenance

    Troubleshooting

    General

    The welding machines are equipped with an intelligent safety system, making it possible to dispense with nearly all fuses. After correcting any errors, the welding machine can be operated properly again.

    Possible malfunctions, warning notices or status codes are shown on the display as plain text dialogs.

    1. Troubleshooting and Maintenance
    2. Troubleshooting

    General

    The welding machines are equipped with an intelligent safety system, making it possible to dispense with nearly all fuses. After correcting any errors, the welding machine can be operated properly again.

    Possible malfunctions, warning notices or status codes are shown on the display as plain text dialogs.

    1. Troubleshooting and Maintenance
    2. Troubleshooting

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from electrical current.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Before starting work, switch off all the devices and components involved and disconnect them from the grid.

    Secure all devices and components involved so they cannot be switched back on.

    After opening the device, use a suitable measuring instrument to check that electrically charged components (such as capacitors) have been discharged.

    WARNING!

    Danger due to insufficient ground conductor connection.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    The housing screws provide a suitable ground conductor connection for grounding the housing.

    The housing screws must not under any circumstances be replaced by other screws without a reliable ground conductor connection.

    1. Troubleshooting and Maintenance
    2. Troubleshooting

    MIG/MAG welding – current limit

    “Current limit” is a safety function for MIG/MAG welding, whereby

    • it is possible to operate the welding machine at the power limit and
    • process reliability is ensured.

    If the welding power is too high, the arc gets continuously smaller and may be extinguished. To stop the arc from being extinguished, the welding machine reduces the wire speed and therefore the welding power.
    A corresponding message appears on the status bar of the display.

    Remedial measures

    • Reduce one of the following welding power parameters:
      Wire speed
      Welding current
      Welding voltage
      Material thickness
    • Increase the distance between the contact tip and workpiece
    1. Troubleshooting and Maintenance
    2. Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting the welding machine

    Welding machine not working
    Power switch is switched on; displays and indicators do not illuminate
    Cause:Mains lead damaged or broken, mains plug not inserted
    Remedy:Check mains lead, if necessary insert mains plug
    Cause:Mains socket or mains plug faulty
    Remedy:Replace faulty parts
    Cause:Mains fuse
    Remedy:Replace mains fuse
    Cause:Short circuit on the 24 V power supply of the SpeedNet connection or external sensor
    Remedy:Disconnect connected components
    No welding current
    Power switch is on, overtemperature is displayed
    Cause:Overload, duty cycle exceeded
    Remedy:Observe the duty cycle
    Cause:Thermal automatic circuit breaker has tripped
    Remedy:Wait until the welding machine automatically comes back on after the end of the cooling phase
    Cause:Limited supply of cooling air
    Remedy:Ensure accessibility to cooling air ducts
    Cause:Fan in the welding machine defective
    Remedy:Contact After-Sales Service
    No welding current
    Power source switched on; displays and indicators light up
    Cause:Incorrect ground connection
    Remedy:Check ground connection and terminal for polarity
    Cause:Power cable in welding torch damaged or broken.
    Remedy:Replace the welding torch
    No function after pressing torch trigger
    Power switch switched on; displays and indicators light up
    Cause:Control plug not plugged in
    Remedy:Plug in control plug
    Cause:Welding torch or welding torch control line faulty
    Remedy:Replace the welding torch
    Cause:Interconnecting hosepack defective or not correctly connected
    (not in the case of welding machines with integrated wire drive)
    Remedy:Check interconnecting hosepack
    No shielding gas
    All other functions are OK
    Cause:Gas cylinder empty
    Remedy:Change gas cylinder
    Cause:Gas pressure regulator faulty
    Remedy:Replace the gas pressure regulator
    Cause:Gas hose is not fitted or is damaged
    Remedy:Fit or change gas hose
    Cause:Welding torch faulty
    Remedy:Change welding torch
    Cause:Gas solenoid valve faulty
    Remedy:Contact After-Sales Service
    Poor-quality weld properties
    Cause:Wrong welding parameters, wrong correction parameters
    Remedy:Check settings
    Cause:Poor ground earth connection
    Remedy:Establish good contact with workpiece
    Cause:Several welding machines welding one part
    Remedy:Increase distance between hosepacks and return lead cables;
    Do not use a common ground.
    Cause:Too little or no shielding gas
    Remedy:Check pressure regulator, gas hose, gas solenoid valve, welding torch gas connection, etc.
    Cause:Welding torch leaks
    Remedy:Change welding torch
    Cause:Incorrect or heavily worn contact tip
    Remedy:Change contact tip
    Cause:Incorrect wire alloy or incorrect wire diameter
    Remedy:Check wire electrode in use
    Cause:Incorrect wire alloy or incorrect wire diameter
    Remedy:Check the weldability of the base material
    Cause:Shielding gas not suitable for wire alloy
    Remedy:Use correct shielding gas
    Excessive weld spatter
    Cause:Shielding gas, wirefeeder, welding torch or workpiece contaminated or magnetically charged
    Remedy:Perform R/L alignment;
    Adjust arc length;
    Check shielding gas, wirefeeder, welding torch position or workpiece for contamination or magnetic charge
    Wirefeed problems
    when using long welding torch hosepacks
    Cause:Incorrect arrangement of welding torch hosepack
    Remedy:Arrange the welding torch hosepack in as straight a line as possible, avoiding tight bends
    Irregular wire speed
    Cause:Braking force has been set too high
    Remedy:Loosen the brake
    Cause:Contact tip hole too narrow
    Remedy:Use suitable contact tip
    Cause:Inner liner in the welding torch faulty
    Remedy:Check the inner liner for kinks, dirt, etc. and replace if necessary
    Cause:Feed rollers not suitable for wire electrode used
    Remedy:Use suitable feed rollers
    Cause:Feed rollers have the wrong contact pressure
    Remedy:Optimize contact pressure
    Welding torch gets very hot
    Cause:Welding torch is inadequately sized
    Remedy:Observe duty cycle and load limits
    Cause:For water-cooled systems only: Coolant flow too low
    Remedy:Check coolant level, coolant flow rate, coolant contamination, etc.;
    coolant pump blocked: Switch on the shaft of the coolant pump at the gland using a screwdriver
    Cause:For water-cooled systems only: The "Cooling unit operating mode" setup parameter is set to "off".
    Remedy:In the Setup menu, set the "Cooling unit operating mode" parameter to "eco", "on" or "auto" in the component settings.
    1. Troubleshooting and Maintenance

    Service, maintenance and disposal

    General

    The welding machine only requires minimal service and maintenance under normal operating conditions. However, some important points must be noted to ensure that the welding system remains in a usable condition for many years.

    1. Troubleshooting and Maintenance
    2. Service, maintenance and disposal

    General

    The welding machine only requires minimal service and maintenance under normal operating conditions. However, some important points must be noted to ensure that the welding system remains in a usable condition for many years.

    1. Troubleshooting and Maintenance
    2. Service, maintenance and disposal

    Safety

    WARNING!

    Danger from electrical current.

    This can result in serious personal injury and damage to property.

    Before starting work, switch off all the devices and components involved and disconnect them from the grid.

    Secure all devices and components involved so they cannot be switched back on.

    After opening the device, use a suitable measuring instrument to check that electrically charged components (such as capacitors) have been discharged.

    1. Troubleshooting and Maintenance
    2. Service, maintenance and disposal

    At every start-up

    • Check mains plug, mains cable, welding torch, interconnecting hosepack and grounding (earthing) connection for damage
    • Check whether the all-round clearance of 0.5 m (1 ft. 8 in.) is kept to ensure that the cooling air can easily flow and escape.

    NOTE!

    Air inlets and outlets must never be covered, not even partially.

    1. Troubleshooting and Maintenance
    2. Service, maintenance and disposal

    Every 2 months

    • If present: clean air filter
    1. Troubleshooting and Maintenance
    2. Service, maintenance and disposal

    Every 6 months

    CAUTION!

    Danger due to the effect of compressed air.

    This can result in damage to property.

    Do not clean electronic components with compressed air from a short distance.

    • Open the device
    • Blow out the inside of the device with dry and reduced compressed air
    • Also clean the cooling air ducts if there is a large accumulation of dust
    1. Troubleshooting and Maintenance
    2. Service, maintenance and disposal

    Updating the firmware

    IMPORTANT! To update the firmware, you need a PC or laptop that is connected to the welding machine via an Ethernet network.

    1Get the latest firmware (e.g. from the DownloadCenter)
    File format: official_TPSi_X.X.X-XXXX.ffw
    2Establish an Ethernet connection between the PC/laptop and welding machine
    3Open the welding machine SmartManager (see page(→))
    4Transfer the firmware to the welding machine (see page(→))
    1. Troubleshooting and Maintenance
    2. Service, maintenance and disposal

    Disposal

    Disposal must only be carried out in accordance with the section of the same name in the "Safety rules" chapter.

    Appendix

    Average consumption values during welding

    Average shielding gas consumption during TIG welding

    Gas nozzle size

    4

    5

    6

    7

    8

    10

    Average consumption

    6 l/min

    8 l/min

    10 l/min

    12 l/min

    12 l/min

    15 l/min

    1. Appendix

    Average consumption values during welding

    Average shielding gas consumption during TIG welding

    Gas nozzle size

    4

    5

    6

    7

    8

    10

    Average consumption

    6 l/min

    8 l/min

    10 l/min

    12 l/min

    12 l/min

    15 l/min

    1. Appendix
    2. Average consumption values during welding

    Average shielding gas consumption during TIG welding

    Gas nozzle size

    4

    5

    6

    7

    8

    10

    Average consumption

    6 l/min

    8 l/min

    10 l/min

    12 l/min

    12 l/min

    15 l/min

    1. Appendix
    2. Average consumption values during welding

    Average shielding gas consumption during MIG/MAG welding

    Wire electrode diameter

    1.0 mm

    1.2 mm

    1.6 mm

    2.0 mm

    2 x 1.2 mm (TWIN)

    Average consumption

    10 l/min

    12 l/min

    16 l/min

    20 l/min

    24 l/min

    1. Appendix
    2. Average consumption values during welding

    Average wire electrode consumption during MIG/MAG welding

    Average wire electrode consumption at a wire speed of 5 m/min

     

    1.0 mm wire electrode diameter

    1.2 mm wire electrode diameter

    1.6 mm wire electrode diameter

    Steel wire electrode

    1.8 kg/h

    2.7 kg/h

    4.7 kg/h

    Aluminum wire electrode

    0.6 kg/h

    0.9 kg/h

    1.6 kg/h

    CrNi wire electrode

    1.9 kg/h

    2.8 kg/h

    4.8 kg/h

    Average wire electrode consumption at a wire speed of 10 m/min

     

    1.0 mm wire electrode diameter

    1.2 mm wire electrode diameter

    1.6 mm wire electrode diameter

    Steel wire electrode

    3.7 kg/h

    5.3 kg/h

    9.5 kg/h

    Aluminum wire electrode

    1.3 kg/h

    1.8 kg/h

    3.2 kg/h

    CrNi wire electrode

    3.8 kg/h

    5.4 kg/h

    9.6 kg/h

    1. Appendix

    Technical data

    Explanation of the term duty cycle

    The duty cycle (ED) is the period of a ten minute cycle in which the device may be operated at the stated power without overheating.

    NOTE!

    The ED values cited on the rating plate relate to an ambient temperature of 40 °C.

    If the ambient temperature is higher, the ED or power must be lowered accordingly.

    Example: Welding with 150 A at 60% ED

    • Welding phase = 60% of 10 mins = 6 mins
    • Cool-down phase = rest time = 4 mins
    • Following the cool-down phase, the cycle begins again.

    To use the device without interruptions:

    1Search for a 100% ED value in the technical data, which corresponds to the existing ambient temperature.
    2Reduce the power or amperage value correspondingly so that the device can operate without a cool-down phase.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    Explanation of the term duty cycle

    The duty cycle (ED) is the period of a ten minute cycle in which the device may be operated at the stated power without overheating.

    NOTE!

    The ED values cited on the rating plate relate to an ambient temperature of 40 °C.

    If the ambient temperature is higher, the ED or power must be lowered accordingly.

    Example: Welding with 150 A at 60% ED

    • Welding phase = 60% of 10 mins = 6 mins
    • Cool-down phase = rest time = 4 mins
    • Following the cool-down phase, the cycle begins again.

    To use the device without interruptions:

    1Search for a 100% ED value in the technical data, which corresponds to the existing ambient temperature.
    2Reduce the power or amperage value correspondingly so that the device can operate without a cool-down phase.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    Special Voltage

    For devices designed for special voltages, the technical data on the rating plate applies.

    The following applies for all devices with a permitted grid voltage of up to 460 V: The standard mains plug allows the user to operate with a grid voltage of up to 400 V. For grid voltages up to 460 V fit a mains plug permitted for such use or install the mains supply directly.

    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    Overview with critical raw materials, year of production of the device

    Overview with critical raw materials:
    An overview of which critical raw materials are contained in this device can be found at the following Internet address.
    www.fronius.com/en/about-fronius/sustainability.

    To calculate the year of production of the device:
    • Each device is provided with a serial number
    • The serial number consists of 8 digits - for example 28020099
    • The first two digits give the number from which the year of production of the device can be calculated
    • This figure minus 11 gives the year of production
      • For example: Serial number = 28020065, calculation of the year of production = 28 - 11 = 17, year of production = 2017
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 300i DC

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 400 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

    12.7 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

    16.9 A

    Mains fuse

    16 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    +/- 15%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    156 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 300 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 300 A

    MMA

    10 – 300 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 300 A
    60% / 260 A
    100% / 240 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 – 26.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 29.0 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 32.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    99 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    700 x 300 x 510 mm
    27.6 x 11.8 x 20.1 in.

    Weight

    46.4 kg / 102.29 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    75 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    39.7 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 300 A / 32.0 V

    87%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 300i DC /nc

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 380 / 400 / 460 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

     

    3 x 380 V

    13.57 A

    3 x 400 V

    12.7 A

    3 x 460 V

    11.2 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

     

    3 x 380 V

    18.1 A

    3 x 400 V

    16.9 A

    3 x 460 V

    14.8 A

    Mains fuse

    16 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    +/- 15%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    156 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 300 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 300 A

    MMA

    10 – 300 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 300 A
    60% / 260 A
    100% / 240 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

    TIG

    10.1 – 26.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 29.0 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 32.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    99 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    700 x 300 x 510 mm
    27.6 x 11.8 x 20.1 in.

    Weight

    45.1 kg / 99.43 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    75 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    39.7 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 300 A / 32.0 V

    87%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 300i DC /MV/nc

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 200/230/240/380/400/460/600 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

     

    3 x 200 V

    26.1 A

    3 x 230 V

    22.5 A

    3 x 240 V

    20.9 A

    3 x 380 V

    13.5 A

    3 x 400 V

    12.7 A

    3 x 460 V

    11.2 A

    3 x 600 V

    11.6 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

     

    3 x 200 V

    35.2 A

    3 x 230 V

    30.2 A

    3 x 240 V

    28.2 A

    3 x 380 V

    18.1 A

    3 x 400 V

    16.9 A

    3 x 460 V

    14.8 A

    3 x 600 V

    14.8 A

    Mains fuse
    3 x 200/230/240 V
    3 x 380/400/460/600 V


    35 A slow-blow
    16 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    -10 / +6%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    172 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 300 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 300 A

    MMA

    10 – 300 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 300 A
    60% / 260 A
    100% / 240 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 – 26.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 29.0 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 32.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    104 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    700 x 300 x 510 mm
    27.6 x 11.8 x 20.1 in.

    Weight

    46.5 kg / 102.52 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    75 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    39.7 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 300 A / 32.0 V

    87%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 400i DC

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 400 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

    18.4 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

    24.9 A

    Mains fuse

    35 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    +/- 15%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    ~ 92 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 400 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 400 A

    MMA

    10 – 400 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 400 A | 60% / 360 A | 100% / 320 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 – 26.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 34.0 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 36.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    99 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 510 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 20.1 in.

    Weight

    49.9 kg / 110.01 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    75 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    40.9 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 400 A / 36.0 V

    87%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 400i DC /nc

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 380 / 400 / 460 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

     

    3 x 380 V

    19.3 A

    3 x 400 V

    18.4 A

    3 x 460 V

    16.1 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

     

    3 x 380 V

    26.2 A

    3 x 400 V

    24.9 A

    3 x 460 V

    21.7 A

    Mains fuse

    35 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    +/- 15%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    ~ 92 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 400 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 400 A

    MMA

    10 – 400 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 400 A
    60% / 360 A
    100% / 320 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

    TIG

    10.1 – 26.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 34.0 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 36.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    99 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 510 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 20.1 in.

    Weight

    48.0 kg / 105.82 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    75 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    40.9 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 400 A / 36.0 V

    87%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 400i DC /MV/nc

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 200/230/240/380/400/460/600 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

     

    3 x 200 V

    37.8 A

    3 x 230 V

    34.1 A

    3 x 240 V

    30.7 A

    3 x 380 V

    19.3 A

    3 x 400 V

    18.4 A

    3 x 460 V

    16.1 A

    3 x 600 V

    15.7 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

     

    3 x 200 V

    53.3 A

    3 x 230 V

    45.6 A

    3 x 240 V

    41.7 A

    3 x 380 V

    26.2 A

    3 x 400 V

    24.9 A

    3 x 460 V

    21.7 A

    3 x 600 V

    20.8 A

    Mains fuse

     

    3 x 200/230/240 V

    63 A slow-blow

    3 x 380/400/460 V

    35 A slow-blow

    3 x 600 V

    16 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    -10 / +6%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    97 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 400 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 400 A

    MMA

    10 – 400 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 400 A
    60% / 360 A
    100% / 320 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 – 26.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 34.0 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 36.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    104 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 510 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 20.1 in.

    Weight

    49.3 kg / 108.69 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    75 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    40.9 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 400 A / 36 V

    87%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 500i DC

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 400 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

    21.9 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

    34.4 A

    Mains fuse

    35 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    +/- 15%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    55 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 500 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 500 A

    MMA

    10 – 500 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 500 A
    60% / 430 A
    100% / 360 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 – 30.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 36.5 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 40.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    99 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 510 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 20.1 in.

    Weight

    51.5 kg / 113.54 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    75 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    40.5 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 500 A / 40.0 V

    88%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 500i DC /nc

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 380 / 400 / 460 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

     

    3 x 380 V

    22.8 A

    3 x 400 V

    21.9 A

    3 x 460 V

    19.2 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

     

    3 x 380 V

    36.0 A

    3 x 400 V

    34.4 A

    3 x 460 V

    30.0 A

    Mains fuse

    35 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    +/- 15%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    55 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 500 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 500 A

    MMA

    10 – 500 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 500 A
    60% / 430 A
    100% / 360 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 - 30 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 36.5 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 40.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    99 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 510 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 20.1 in.

    Weight

    49.7 kg / 109.57 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    75 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    40.5 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 500 A / 40.0 V

    88%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 500i DC /MV/nc

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 200/230/240/380/400/460/600 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

     

    3 x 200 V

    43.1 A

    3 x 230 V

    38.9 A

    3 x 240 V

    36.2 A

    3 x 380 V

    22.8 A

    3 x 400 V

    21.9 A

    3 x 460 V

    19.2 A

    3 x 600 V

    18.4 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

     

    3 x 200 V

    68.1 A

    3 x 230 V

    62.0 A

    3 x 240 V

    57.3 A

    3 x 380 V

    36.0 A

    3 x 400 V

    34.4 A

    3 x 460 V

    30.0 A

    3 x 600 V

    27.2 A

    Mains fuse

    3 x 200/230/240 V

    63 A slow-blow

    3 x 380/400/460/600 V

    35 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    -10 / +6%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    71 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 500 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 500 A

    MMA

    10 – 500 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

     

    U1 = 200 - 240 V
    TIG, MIG/MAG


    40% / 500 A
    60% / 430 A
    100% / 360 A

    U1 = 200 - 240 V
    MMA

    40% / 450 A
    60% / 390 A
    100% / 320 A

    U1 = 380 - 600 V

    40% / 500 A
    60% / 430 A
    100% / 360 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 – 30.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 36.5 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 40.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    104 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 510 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 20.1 in.

    Weight

    51.3 kg / 113.10 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    75 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    40.5 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 500 A / 40.0 V

    88%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 300i AC/DC

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 400 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

    15.5 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

    18.4 A

    Mains fuse

    16 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    +/- 15%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    143 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 300 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 300 A

    MMA

    10 – 300 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 300 A
    60% / 260 A
    100% / 240 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 – 26.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 29.0 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 32.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    101 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 720 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 28.41 in.

    Weight

    64.4 kg / 141.98 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    77 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    48.5 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 300 A / 32.0 V

    83%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 300i AC/DC /nc

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 380 / 400 / 460 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

     

    3 x 380 V

    16.3 A

    3 x 400 V

    15.5 A

    3 x 460 V

    13.6 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

     

    3 x 380 V

    19.4 A

    3 x 400 V

    18.4 A

    3 x 460 V

    16.2 A

    Mains fuse

    16 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    +/- 15%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    143 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 300 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 300 A

    MMA

    10 – 300 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 300 A
    60% / 260 A
    100% / 240 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

    TIG

    10.1 – 26.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 29.0 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 32.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    101 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 720 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 28.41 in.

    Weight

    63.1 kg / 139.11 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    75 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    48.5 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 300 A / 32.0 V

    83%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 300i AC/DC /MV/nc

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 200/230/240/380/400/460/600 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

     

    3 x 200 V

    31.0 A

    3 x 230 V

    26.7 A

    3 x 240 V

    23.5 A

    3 x 380 V

    16.3 A

    3 x 400 V

    15.5 A

    3 x 460 V

    13.6 A

    3 x 600 V

    12.3 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

     

    3 x 200 V

    37.9 A

    3 x 230 V

    32.5 A

    3 x 240 V

    28.8 A

    3 x 380 V

    19.4 A

    3 x 400 V

    18.4 A

    3 x 460 V

    16.2 A

    3 x 600 V

    14.9 A

    Mains fuse

    3 x 200/230/240 V

    35 A slow-blow

    3 x 380/400/460/600 V

    16 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    -10 / +6%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    121 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 300 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 300 A

    MMA

    10 – 300 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 300 A
    60% / 260 A
    100% / 240 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 – 26.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 29.0 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 32.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    102 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 720 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 28.41 in.

    Weight

    64.5 kg / 142.20 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    77 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    48.5 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 300 A / 32.0 V

    83%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 400i AC/DC

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 400 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

    22.7 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

    30.8 A

    Mains fuse

    35 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    +/- 15%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    97 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 400 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 400 A

    MMA

    10 – 400 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 400 A
    60% / 360 A
    100% / 320 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 – 26.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 34.0 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 36.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    101 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 720 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 28.41 in.

    Weight

    68.8 kg / 151.68 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    77 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    46.7 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 400 A / 36.0 V

    84%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 400i AC/DC /nc

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 380 / 400 / 460 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

     

    3 x 380 V

    23.9 A

    3 x 400 V

    22.7 A

    3 x 460 V

    19.8 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

     

    3 x 380 V

    32.3 A

    3 x 400 V

    30.8 A

    3 x 460 V

    27.1 A

    Mains fuse

    35 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    +/- 15%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    97 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 400 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 400 A

    MMA

    10 – 400 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 400 A
    60% / 360 A
    100% / 320 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 – 26.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 34.0 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 36.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    101 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 720 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 28.41 in.

    Weight

    66.9 kg / 147.49 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    77 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    46.7 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 400 A / 36.0 V

    84%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 400i
    AC/DC /MV/nc

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 200/230/240/380/400/460/600 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

     

    3 x 200 V

    45.7 A

    3 x 230 V

    39.4 A

    3 x 240 V

    34.6 A

    3 x 380 V

    23.9 A

    3 x 400 V

    22.7 A

    3 x 460 V

    19.8 A

    3 x 600 V

    18.0 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

     

    3 x 200 V

    63.3 A

    3 x 230 V

    54.5 A

    3 x 240 V

    47.1 A

    3 x 380 V

    32.3 A

    3 x 400 V

    30.8 A

    3 x 460 V

    27.1 A

    3 x 600 V

    25.1 A

    Mains fuse

    3 x 200/230/240 V

    63 A slow-blow

    3 x 380/400/460/600 V

    35 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    -10 / +10%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    approx. 90 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 - 400 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 - 400 A

    MMA

    10 - 400 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 400 A
    60% / 360 A
    100% / 320 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 - 26.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 - 34.0 V

    MMA

    20.4 - 36.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    102 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions L x W x H

    706 x 300 x 720 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 28.41 in.

    Weight

    68.4 kg / 150.80 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    77 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    46.7 W

    Power source efficiency at
    400 A / 36.0 V

    84%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 500i AC/DC

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 400 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

    24.8 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

    39.2 A

    Mains fuse

    35 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    +/- 15%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    50 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 500 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 500 A

    MMA

    10 – 500 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 500 A
    60% / 430 A
    100% / 360 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 – 30.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 36.5 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 40.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    101 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 720 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 28.41 in.

    Weight

    69.6 kg / 153.44 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    77 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    48.5 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 500 A / 40.0 V

    85%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 500i AC/DC /nc

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 380 / 400 / 460 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

     

    3 x 380 V

    26.0 A

    3 x 400 V

    24.8 A

    3 x 460 V

    21.6 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

     

    3 x 380 V

    41.0 A

    3 x 400 V

    39.2 A

    3 x 460 V

    34.2 A

    Mains fuse

    35 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    +/- 15%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    50 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 500 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 500 A

    MMA

    10 – 500 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

    40% / 500 A
    60% / 430 A
    100% / 360 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 – 30.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 36.5 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 40.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    101 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 720 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 28.41 in.

    Weight

    67.8 kg / 149.47 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    77 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    48.5 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 500 A / 40.0 V

    85%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    iWave 500i AC/DC /MV/nc

    Mains voltage (U1)

    3 x 200/230/240/380/400/460/600 V

    Max. effective primary current (I1eff)

     

    3 x 200 V

    44.6 A

    3 x 230 V

    44.0 A

    3 x 240 V

    43.1 A

    3 x 380 V

    26.0 A

    3 x 400 V

    24.8 A

    3 x 460 V

    21.6 A

    3 x 600 V

    18.9 A

    Max. primary current (I1max)

     

    3 x 200 V

    70.5 A

    3 x 230 V

    69.9 A

    3 x 240 V

    65.5 A

    3 x 380 V

    41.0 A

    3 x 400 V

    39.2 A

    3 x 460 V

    34.2 A

    3 x 600 V

    29.8 A

    Mains fuse

    3 x 200/230/240 V

    63 A slow-blow

    3 x 380/400/460/600 V

    35 A slow-blow

    Mains voltage tolerance

    -10 / +6%

    Mains frequency

    50/60 Hz

    Cos phi (1)

    0.99

    Max. permitted grid impedance Zmax on PCC1)

    52 mOhm

    Recommended residual-current circuit breaker

    Type B

    Welding current range (I2)

     

    TIG

    3 – 500 A

    MIG/MAG

    3 – 500 A

    MMA

    10 – 500 A

    Welding current
    at 10 min/40 °C (104 °F)

     

    U1 = 200 - 240 V
    TIG, MIG/MAG


    40% / 500 A
    60% / 430 A
    100% / 360 A

    U1 = 200 - 240 V
    MMA


    40% / 450 A
    60% / 390 A
    100% / 320 A

    U1 = 380 - 600 V

    40% / 500 A
    60% / 430 A
    100% / 360 A

    Output voltage range according to standard characteristic (U2)

     

    TIG

    10.1 – 30.0 V

    MIG/MAG

    14.2 – 36.5 V

    MMA

    20.4 – 40.0 V

    Open circuit voltage
    (U0 peak / U0 r.m.s)

    102 V

    Striking voltage (UP)

    10 kV
    The arc ignition device is suitable for manual operation.

    Protection class

    IP 23

    EMC emission class

    A 2)

    Dimensions l x w x h

    706 x 300 x 720 mm
    27.8 x 11.8 x 28.41 in.

    Weight

    69.2 kg / 152.56 lb.

    Max. noise emission (LWA)

    77 dB (A)

    Idle state power consumption at 400 V

    48.5 W

    Welding machine efficiency at 500 A / 40.0 V

    85%

    Max. shielding gas pressure

    7 bar/102 psi

    1)
    Interface to a 230/400-V and 50-Hz public grid
    2)
    A device in emissions class A is not intended for use in residential areas in which the power is supplied via a public low-voltage grid.
    The electromagnetic compatibility may be influenced by conducted or radiated radio frequencies.
    1. Appendix
    2. Technical data

    Radio parameters

    Compliance with directive 2014/53/EU - Radio Equipment Directive (RED)

    The following table provides information on the frequency bands used and the maximum HF transmission power of Fronius wireless radio products sold in the EU, in accordance with Articles 10.8 (a) and 10.8 (b) of the RED.

    Frequency range
    Channels used
    Power

    Modulation

    2412 - 2462 MHz
    Channel: 1 - 11 b, g, n HT20
    Channel: 3 - 9 HT40
    < 16 dBm

    802.11b: DSSS
    (1 Mbps DBPSK, 2 Mbps DQPSK, 5.5/11 Mbps CCK)

    802.11 g: OFDM
    (6/9 Mbps BPSK, 12/18 Mbps QPSK, 24/36 Mbps 16-QAM, 48/54 Mbps 64-QAM)

    802.11n: OFDM
    (6.5 Mbps BPSK, 13/19 Mbps QPSK, 26/39 Mbps16-QAM, 52/58.5/65 Mbps 64-QAM)

    13.56 MHz
    -14.6 dBµA/m at 10 m

    Functions:
    R/W, card emulation and P2P

    Protocol standards:
    ISO 14443A/B, ISO15693, ISO18092,
    NFCIP-2,

    Data rate:
    848 kbps

    Reader/writer, card emulation, peer to peer modes

    2402 - 2482 MHz
    0 - 39
    < 4 dBm

    GFSK